_623MAN.BK Veeder Root TLS3 Series System Set Up Manual

User Manual: manual pdf -FilePursuit

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 222

Download_623MAN.BK Veeder Root TLS3 Series System Set Up Manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Manual No: 576013-623 • Revision: AE

Software Version X32

TLS-3XX Series Consoles
System Setup Manual

Notice
Veeder-Root makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this publication, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Veeder-Root shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this publication.
Veeder-Root reserves the right to change system options or features, or the information contained in this publication.
This publication contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. No part of this publication
may be modified or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Veeder-Root.
Contact TLS Systems Technical Support for additional troubleshooting information at 800-323-1799.
DAMAGE CLAIMS / LOST EQUIPMENT
Thoroughly examine all components and units as soon as they are received. If any cartons are damaged or missing, write a
complete and detailed description of the damage or shortage on the face of the freight bill. The carrier's agent must verify the
inspection and sign the description. Refuse only the damaged product, not the entire shipment.
Veeder-Root must be notified of any damages and/or shortages within 30 days of receipt of the shipment, as stated in our Terms
and Conditions.
VEEDER-ROOT’S PREFERRED CARRIER
1.

Contact Veeder-Root Customer Service at 800-873-3313 with the specific part numbers and quantities that were missing
or received damaged.

2.

Fax signed Bill of Lading (BOL) to Veeder-Root Customer Service at 800-234-5350.

3.

Veeder-Root will file the claim with the carrier and replace the damaged/missing product at no charge to the customer.
Customer Service will work with production facility to have the replacement product shipped as soon as possible.

CUSTOMER’S PREFERRED CARRIER
1.

It is the customer’s responsibility to file a claim with their carrier.

2.

Customer may submit a replacement purchase order. Customer is responsible for all charges and freight associated with
replacement order. Customer Service will work with production facility to have the replacement product shipped as soon as
possible.

3.

If “lost” equipment is delivered at a later date and is not needed, Veeder-Root will allow a Return to Stock without a restocking
fee.

4.

Veeder-Root will NOT be responsible for any compensation when a customer chooses their own carrier.

RETURN SHIPPING
For the parts return procedure, please follow the appropriate instructions in the "General Returned Goods Policy” pages in the
"Policies and Literature" section of the Veeder-Root North American Environmental Products price list. Veeder-Root will not
accept any return product without a Return Goods Authorization (RGA) number clearly printed on the outside of the package.

©Veeder-Root 2011. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents

1 Tables
1 Introduction
Contractor Certification Requirements ...........................................................................1-1
Related Manuals ............................................................................................................1-1
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................1-2
Safety Warnings ............................................................................................................1-2

2 Front Panel Keypads
Arrangement of Keys .....................................................................................................2-1
Operating Keys......................................................................................................2-1
Alphanumeric Keys................................................................................................2-1
Blue Key (Maintenance Tracker - TLS-350 Only)..................................................2-2
White Key (Maintenance Report - TLS-350 Only) .................................................2-2
Using the Operating Keys ..............................................................................................2-2
Using the Alphanumeric Keys ........................................................................................2-3
Entering Alphanumeric Data..................................................................................2-4
Special Characters and Cursor Movement............................................................2-4

3 Setup Mode Organization
Functions .......................................................................................................................3-1
Steps ..............................................................................................................................3-1
Setup Mode Programming Table ...................................................................................3-1

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console
Security Code Enable/Disable .......................................................................................4-1
TLS-300 Consoles.................................................................................................4-1
TLS-350 Consoles.................................................................................................4-1
Battery Backup ..............................................................................................................4-6
Applying AC Power to the Console ................................................................................4-6

5 System Setup
Programming Guidelines ...............................................................................................5-1
Automatic Return to Operating Mode ............................................................................5-1
Setup Data Warning ......................................................................................................5-1
Printing a Setup Data Report .........................................................................................5-1
Selecting the System Setup Function ............................................................................5-2
System Language ..........................................................................................................5-2
System Units ..................................................................................................................5-2
Setting the Date and Time Format .................................................................................5-3
Current Date ..................................................................................................................5-3
Current Time ..................................................................................................................5-4
Report Headers .............................................................................................................5-4
Shift Start Times ............................................................................................................5-4
Shift BIR Printouts .........................................................................................................5-5
Daily BIR Printouts .........................................................................................................5-5
Ticketed Delivery ...........................................................................................................5-5
TC Ticketed Delivery .....................................................................................................5-6
Close Day of Week ........................................................................................................5-6
Variance Reports ...........................................................................................................5-6
Daily Delivery Variance Reports............................................................................5-6
Weekly Delivery Variance Reports ........................................................................5-6
Periodic Delivery Variance Reports.......................................................................5-7

iii

Table of Contents

Daily Book Variance Reports.................................................................................5-7
Weekly Book Variance Reports.............................................................................5-7
Periodic Book Variance Reports............................................................................5-7
Daily Variance Analysis Reports ...........................................................................5-7
Weekly Variance Analysis Reports........................................................................5-7
Periodic Variance Analysis Reports ......................................................................5-8
Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings ...........................................................................5-8
Enable Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings and Alarms ...................................5-8
Disable Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings......................................................5-9
Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings .............................................................................5-9
Enable Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings and Alarms .....................................5-9
Disable Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings and Alarms ..................................5-10
Line Re-Enable Method ...............................................................................................5-10
Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings ..........................................................................5-10
Enable Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings and Alarms...................................5-11
Disable Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings .....................................................5-11
Line Annual Test Needed Warnings ............................................................................5-11
Enable Line Annual Test Needed Warnings and Alarms ....................................5-12
Disable Line Annual Test Needed Warnings and Alarms....................................5-12
Remote Printer Page Eject ..........................................................................................5-13
Print TC Volumes .........................................................................................................5-13
Temperature Compensation Value ..............................................................................5-13
Tanker Load Report - International Option ..................................................................5-14
Stick Height Offset - International Option ....................................................................5-14
Ullage ...........................................................................................................................5-14
H-Protocol Data Format - International Option ............................................................5-14
Precision Test Duration (PLLD/WPLLD Only) .............................................................5-15
Precision Line Test Auto-Confirm ................................................................................5-15
Daylight Savings Time .................................................................................................5-16
Re-direct Local Printout ...............................................................................................5-16
QPLD Monthly Printout - International Option ..............................................................5-17
Euro Protocol Prefix .....................................................................................................5-17
BDIM Trans Alarm Delay .............................................................................................5-17
System Security Code .................................................................................................5-17
Maintenance History ....................................................................................................5-18
Tank Chart Security .....................................................................................................5-18
Custom Alarm Labels ..................................................................................................5-19
Service Notice (TLS-350 Consoles Only) ....................................................................5-27
System Beeper ............................................................................................................5-28
Mass/Density ...............................................................................................................5-29
Fiscal Height Security ..................................................................................................5-30

6 Communications Setup
Selecting the Communications Setup Function .............................................................6-1
Port Settings ..................................................................................................................6-1
Note: Port Settings - International Installations With SiteLink modems.................6-1
Baud Rate..............................................................................................................6-1
Parity .....................................................................................................................6-2
Stop Bit ..................................................................................................................6-2
Data Length ...........................................................................................................6-2
Dial Type ...............................................................................................................6-3
Answer On.............................................................................................................6-3
Security Code ........................................................................................................6-3
Setting the Modem Type (international Installations) ............................................6-4

iv

Table of Contents

Modem Setup String..............................................................................................6-4
Dial Tone Interval ..................................................................................................6-4
DTR Normal State .................................................................................................6-4
Specifying Port Settings for Additional Communication Modules..........................6-5
Continue Communications Setup ..........................................................................6-5
Auto-Transmit Setup (RS-232 or RS-232/RS-485 Modules Only) .................................6-5
Auto-Transmit Method ...........................................................................................6-5
Auto Delay Time ....................................................................................................6-6
Auto Repeat Time..................................................................................................6-6
Continue Communications Setup ..........................................................................6-6
Phone Directory Setup ...................................................................................................6-7
Receiver Configuration ..........................................................................................6-7
Receiver Location..................................................................................................6-7
Receiver Telephone Number.................................................................................6-7
Select Modem........................................................................................................6-8
Receiver Type .......................................................................................................6-8
Retry Number ........................................................................................................6-8
Retry Delay Time...................................................................................................6-9
Confirmation Report ..............................................................................................6-9
Setting Up Additional Phone Numbers ..................................................................6-9
Continue Communications Setup ..........................................................................6-9
Auto-Dial Setup ............................................................................................................6-10
Receiver Report List ............................................................................................6-10
Auto Dial Method: All Phones/Single Phone .......................................................6-11
Auto-Dial Frequency: Specific Date.....................................................................6-11
Auto-Dial Frequency: Annually ............................................................................6-12
Auto-Dial Frequency: Monthly .............................................................................6-13
Auto-Dial Frequency: Weekly ..............................................................................6-13
Auto-Dial Frequency: Daily..................................................................................6-14
Auto-Dial Frequency: BIR End ............................................................................6-14
Setting Up the Frequency for Additional Receivers
(Single Phone Only) ............................................................................................6-15
Continue Communications Setup ........................................................................6-15
Auto-Dial Alarm Setup .................................................................................................6-15
In-Tank Alarms ....................................................................................................6-16
Remaining Alarm Groups ....................................................................................6-17
Liquid Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................6-17
Vapor Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................6-17
External Inputs Alarms ........................................................................................6-17
Line Leak Alarms (VLLD) ....................................................................................6-17
Groundwater Sensor Alarms ...............................................................................6-17
2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................6-18
3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................6-18
Receiver Alarms ..................................................................................................6-18
Power Side DIM Alarms ......................................................................................6-18
Reconciliation Alarms ..........................................................................................6-18
Pressure Line Leak Detector (PLLD) Alarms ......................................................6-18
Wireless Pressure Line Leak Detector (WPLLD) Alarms ....................................6-19
Communication Side DIM Alarms........................................................................6-19
Smart Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................6-19
Pump Relay Monitor Alarm..................................................................................6-19
VMCI Dispenser Interface Alarms .......................................................................6-19
VMC Alarms ........................................................................................................6-19
Setting Up Auto-Dial Alarms for Additional Destinations .....................................6-20
RS-232 End of Message ..............................................................................................6-20

v

Table of Contents

7 In-Tank Setup
Selecting the In-Tank Setup Function ............................................................................7-1
Tank Configuration ........................................................................................................7-1
How the System Configures In-Tank Probes ........................................................7-1
Specifying In-Tank Probe Positions.......................................................................7-1
Product Labels ...............................................................................................................7-2
Product Code .................................................................................................................7-2
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion ..................................................................................7-3
Tank Density ..................................................................................................................7-4
Tank Diameter ...............................................................................................................7-5
Tank Profile ....................................................................................................................7-5
Tank Profile Selections..........................................................................................7-5
Procedure ..............................................................................................................7-6
Full Volume ....................................................................................................................7-6
4 or 20 Point Tank Profiles Height/Volume Entries ...............................................7-7
50 Point Tank Profile Height/Volume Entries (Tank Chart Security Disabled) ......7-7
50 Point Tank Profile Entries With Tank Chart Security Enabled..........................7-9
Meter Data Present ......................................................................................................7-11
Vapor Loss Factor - International Option .....................................................................7-11
End Factor ...................................................................................................................7-12
Calibration Update .......................................................................................................7-12
Float Size .....................................................................................................................7-13
Water Warning .............................................................................................................7-14
High Water Limit ..........................................................................................................7-15
Water Alarm Filter ........................................................................................................7-15
Max or Label Vol ..........................................................................................................7-15
Overfill Limit .................................................................................................................7-16
High Product ................................................................................................................7-16
Delivery Limit ...............................................................................................................7-17
Low Product .................................................................................................................7-17
Leak Alarm Limit ..........................................................................................................7-17
Sudden Loss Limit .......................................................................................................7-18
Tank Tilt .......................................................................................................................7-18
Calculating Tank Tilt (H2) ....................................................................................7-18
Entering the Tank Tilt Value ................................................................................7-19
Probe Offset .................................................................................................................7-19
Siphon Manifolded Tank Status ...................................................................................7-20
Line Manifolded Tank Status .......................................................................................7-20
Leak Minimum Periodic ...............................................................................................7-21
Leak Minimum Annual .................................................................................................7-22
Periodic Test Type .......................................................................................................7-22
Annual Test Fail ...........................................................................................................7-22
Periodic Test Fail .........................................................................................................7-23
Gross Test Fail ............................................................................................................7-23
Annual Test Averaging ................................................................................................7-23
Periodic Test Averaging ...............................................................................................7-24
Tank Test Notify ...........................................................................................................7-24
Tank Test Siphon Break ..............................................................................................7-24
Stick Offset (International Option) ................................................................................7-24
HRM Reconciliation Warning Limit (International Option) ............................................7-25
HRM Reconciliation Alarm Limit (international Option) ................................................7-25
Delivery Report Delay Time .........................................................................................7-26

vi

Table of Contents

Pump Threshold ..........................................................................................................7-26
Setting Up Additional Tanks ........................................................................................7-26

8 In-Tank Leak Tests
Selecting the In-Tank Leak Test Setup Function ...........................................................8-1
Leak Test Method: All Tank/Single Tank .......................................................................8-1
Leak Test Frequency .....................................................................................................8-2
Test On Date .........................................................................................................8-2
Annual Test ...........................................................................................................8-3
Monthly Test ..........................................................................................................8-3
Weekly Test...........................................................................................................8-4
Daily Test...............................................................................................................8-4
Automatic Test.......................................................................................................8-4
CSLD - Option .......................................................................................................8-5
Gross Test Auto-Confirm ...............................................................................................8-7
Leak Test Start Time .....................................................................................................8-7
Leak Test Rate ..............................................................................................................8-7
Leak Test Duration ........................................................................................................8-8
Leak Test Early Stop .....................................................................................................8-8
CSLD Report Only .........................................................................................................8-9
Leak Test Report Format ...............................................................................................8-9
Setting Up Additional Tanks ..........................................................................................8-9

9 Fuel Management
Selecting the Fuel Management Function .....................................................................9-1
Delivery Warning Days ..................................................................................................9-1
Daily Time to Print Fuel Management Report ................................................................9-1
Average Daily Sales ......................................................................................................9-2

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection
Line Manifolding Implications for AccuChart ................................................................10-1
PLLD Setup .................................................................................................................10-1
Activating PLLDs .........................................................................................................10-1
Labeling PLLDs ...........................................................................................................10-1
Piping Type ..................................................................................................................10-2
Piping Length ...............................................................................................................10-2
Entering Line Length for Dual Size Flexible Pipe Types .....................................10-3
Entering Line Length for 2.0/3.0 In. Fiberglass Pipe Type ..................................10-3
User Defined Pipe Type - Setup Parameters ...............................................................10-3
Thermal Coefficient ......................................................................................................10-4
0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling .............................................................10-4
0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling .............................................................10-5
Passive 0.1 gph Line Leak Testing ..............................................................................10-5
Shutdown Rate ............................................................................................................10-6
Low Pressure Alarm Shutoff ........................................................................................10-6
Tank Selection .............................................................................................................10-7
Selecting a Dispense Mode .........................................................................................10-7
Pressure Transducer Type ..........................................................................................10-7
Pressure Offset ............................................................................................................10-8
Venting The Line .................................................................................................10-8
Determining a Pressure Offset Value for each Transducer.................................10-9
Entering the Pressure Offset Value for each Transducer....................................10-9
Mechanical Blenders .................................................................................................10-10

vii

Table of Contents

Setting Up Additional PLLDs .....................................................................................10-10

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection
Line Manifolding Implications for AccuChart ................................................................11-1
WPLLD Setup ..............................................................................................................11-1
Activating WPLLDs ......................................................................................................11-1
Labeling WPLLDs ........................................................................................................11-2
Piping Type ..................................................................................................................11-2
Piping Length ...............................................................................................................11-2
0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option ...............................................11-3
0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option ...............................................11-4
Shutdown Rate ............................................................................................................11-4
Pressure Offset ............................................................................................................11-4
Venting The Line .................................................................................................11-5
Determining a Pressure Offset Value for each Transducer.................................11-5
Entering the Pressure Offset Value for each Transducer....................................11-6
Tank Selection .............................................................................................................11-6
Selecting a Dispense Mode .........................................................................................11-6
Setting Up Additional WPLLDs ....................................................................................11-7

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection
VLLD Setup .................................................................................................................12-1
Activating VLLDs .........................................................................................................12-1
Pipe Label and Tank Identification ...............................................................................12-1
Enter Dispense Mode ..................................................................................................12-2
Fuel Type .....................................................................................................................12-3
Piping Length and Type ...............................................................................................12-3
Pump Pressure ............................................................................................................12-4
Shutdown Rate ............................................................................................................12-5
Pumpside Test .............................................................................................................12-5
Wait Mode ....................................................................................................................12-6
New Blender Protocol (NBP) Partner ...........................................................................12-6
Last Annual Test Passed .............................................................................................12-7
Setting Up Additional Line Leak Detectors ..................................................................12-7

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests
Selecting the Line Leak Test Setup Function ..............................................................13-1
Leak Test Setup Method: All Lines/Single Lines .........................................................13-1
Leak Test Frequency ...................................................................................................13-2
On Date ...............................................................................................................13-2
Annual Test .........................................................................................................13-2
Monthly Test ........................................................................................................13-3
Weekly Test.........................................................................................................13-3
Daily Test.............................................................................................................13-4
Leak Test Start Time ...................................................................................................13-4
Leak Test Rate ............................................................................................................13-4
Setting Up Additional Lines ..........................................................................................13-5

14 Line Leak Test Lockout
Selecting the Line Leak Test Lockout Function ...........................................................14-1
Lockout Schedule ........................................................................................................14-1
Daily Schedule .............................................................................................................14-1
Individual Schedules ....................................................................................................14-2

viii

Table of Contents

Entering Additional Test Lockout Schedules ...............................................................14-3

15 Pump Sense Setup
Selecting the Pump Sense Function ............................................................................15-1
Pump Sense Configuration ..........................................................................................15-1
How the System Configures Pump Sense Modules............................................15-1
Specifying Pump Sense Positions.......................................................................15-1
Pump Sense Tank Number .........................................................................................15-2
Pump Sense Dispense Mode ......................................................................................15-2

16 Pump Relay Monitor Setup
Selecting the Pump Relay Monitor Function ................................................................16-1
Pump Relay Monitor Configuration ..............................................................................16-1
How the System Configures Pump Relay Monitor Modules................................16-1
Specifying Pump Relay Monitor Positions...........................................................16-1
Labeling Pump Relay Monitors ....................................................................................16-2
Pump Relay Monitor Relay Input .................................................................................16-2
Pump Relay Monitor Delay Input .................................................................................16-2

17 Reconciliation Setup
Dispenser Module Data String .....................................................................................17-1
Automatic Daily Closing ...............................................................................................17-1
Automatic Shift Closing ................................................................................................17-2
Periodic Reconciliation Mode ......................................................................................17-2
Periodic Reconciliation Alarm ......................................................................................17-3
Remote Report Format ................................................................................................17-4
Temp Compensation ...................................................................................................17-4
Meter Calibration Offset ...............................................................................................17-5
Modify Tank/Meter Map ...............................................................................................17-5

18 Liquid Sensor Setup
Selecting the Liquid Sensor Setup Function ................................................................18-1
Liquid Sensor Configuration ........................................................................................18-1
How the System Configures Liquid Sensors .......................................................18-1
Specifying Liquid Sensor Positions .....................................................................18-1
Liquid Sensor Location ................................................................................................18-2
Liquid Sensor Type ......................................................................................................18-2
Liquid Sensor Category (RS-232 and Remote Display) ..............................................18-3
Setting Up Additional Liquid Sensors ..........................................................................18-3

19 Vapor Sensor Setup
Selecting the Vapor Sensor Setup Function ................................................................19-1
Vapor Sensor Configuration ........................................................................................19-1
How the System Configures Vapor Sensors .......................................................19-1
Specifying Vapor Sensor Positions .....................................................................19-1
Vapor Sensor Location ................................................................................................19-2
Vapor Threshold ..........................................................................................................19-2
Before You Begin ................................................................................................19-2
Specifying Vapor Threshold Levels .....................................................................19-3
Vapor Sensor Category ...............................................................................................19-3
Setting Up Additional Vapor Sensors ..........................................................................19-3

20 Groundwater Sensor Setup

ix

Table of Contents

Selecting the Groundwater Sensor Setup Function .....................................................20-1
Groundwater Sensor Configuration .............................................................................20-1
How the System Configures Groundwater Sensors ............................................20-1
Specifying Groundwater Sensor Positions ..........................................................20-1
Groundwater Sensor Location .....................................................................................20-2
Groundwater Sensor Category ....................................................................................20-2
Setting Up Additional Groundwater Sensors ...............................................................20-2

21 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup
Selecting the 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup Function .......................................................21-1
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Configuration ................................................................................21-1
How the System Configures 2-Wire C.L. Sensors...............................................21-1
Specifying 2-wire C.L. Sensor Positions..............................................................21-1
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Location ........................................................................................21-2
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Type .............................................................................................21-2
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Category .......................................................................................21-2
Setting Up Additional 2-Wire C.L. Sensors ..................................................................21-3

22 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup
Selecting the 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup Function .......................................................22-1
3-Wire C.L. Sensor Configuration ................................................................................22-1
How the System Configures 3-Wire C.L. Sensors...............................................22-1
Specifying 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Positions.............................................................22-1
3-Wire C.L. Sensor Location ........................................................................................22-2
3-Wire C.L. Sensor Mode ............................................................................................22-2
3-Wire C.L. Sensor Category .......................................................................................22-2
Setting Up Additional 3-Wire C.L. Sensors ..................................................................22-3

23 External Input Setup
Selecting the External Input Setup Function ................................................................23-1
External Input Configuration ........................................................................................23-1
How the System Configures Input Devices .........................................................23-1
Specifying Input Positions ...................................................................................23-1
External Input Name ....................................................................................................23-2
External Input Type ......................................................................................................23-2
Switch Orientation ........................................................................................................23-3
External Input Emergency Generator Data ..................................................................23-3
Pump Sense Setup Data .............................................................................................23-3
Selecting a Dispense Mode.................................................................................23-4
Setting Up Additional Inputs ........................................................................................23-4

24 Output Relay Setup
Selecting the Output Relay Setup Function .................................................................24-1
Relay Configuration .....................................................................................................24-1
How the System Configures Output Relays ........................................................24-1
Specifying Output Relay Positions ......................................................................24-1
Relay Designation ........................................................................................................24-2
Selecting Relay Type ...................................................................................................24-2
Assignment Method .....................................................................................................24-3
In-Tank Alarms ....................................................................................................24-3
Remaining Alarm Groups ....................................................................................24-5
Liquid Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................24-5
Vapor Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................24-5
External Inputs Alarms ........................................................................................24-5

x

Table of Contents

Line Leak Alarms (VLLD) ....................................................................................24-5
Groundwater Sensor Alarms ...............................................................................24-5
2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................24-6
3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................24-6
Power Side DIM Alarms ......................................................................................24-6
Reconciliation Alarms ..........................................................................................24-6
Pressure Line Leak Detector (PLLD) Alarms ......................................................24-6
Wireless Pressure Line Leak Detector (WPLLD) Alarms ....................................24-6
Communication Side DIM Alarms........................................................................24-7
Smart Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................24-7
Pump Relay Monitor Alarm..................................................................................24-7
VMCI Dispenser Interface Alarms .......................................................................24-7
VMC Alarms ........................................................................................................24-7
Setting Up Additional Relays .......................................................................................24-8

25 Line Disable Setup
Selecting the PLLD, WPLLD, or VLLD Line Disable Setup Function ...........................25-1
Alarm Assignment Notes .....................................................................................25-1
In-Tank Alarms ............................................................................................................25-1
Remaining Alarm Groups ....................................................................................25-2
Liquid Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................25-3
Vapor Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................25-3
External Input Alarms ..........................................................................................25-3
Line Leak Alarms.................................................................................................25-3
Groundwater Sensor Alarms ...............................................................................25-3
2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................25-3
3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms ..................................................................................25-4
Power Side DIM Alarms ......................................................................................25-4
Reconciliation Alarms ..........................................................................................25-4
Pressure Line Leak Detector (PLLD) Alarms ......................................................25-4
Wireless Pressure Line Leak Detector (WPLLD) Alarms ....................................25-4
Communication Side DIM Alarms........................................................................25-5
Smart Sensor Alarms ..........................................................................................25-5
Pump Relay Monitor Alarm..................................................................................25-5
VMCI Dispenser Interface Alarms .......................................................................25-5
VMC Alarms ........................................................................................................25-5
Setting Up Additional Disables ....................................................................................25-6

26 Smart Sensor Setup
Selecting the Smart Sensor Setup Function ................................................................26-1
Sensor Configuration ...................................................................................................26-1
Smart Sensor Label .....................................................................................................26-2
Selecting Sensor Category ..........................................................................................26-2
Mag Sensor Setup .......................................................................................................26-3
Vac Sensor Setup ........................................................................................................26-4

27 VMC Setup
Selecting the VMC Setup Function ..............................................................................27-1
Add a VMC Serial Number ..........................................................................................27-1
Edit a VMC Serial Number ...........................................................................................27-1
Remove a VMC Serial Number ....................................................................................27-2

28 Archive Utility
Accessing the Archive Utility Function .........................................................................28-1
Archiving Setup Data ...................................................................................................28-1

xi

Table of Contents

Restoring Archived Setup Data ...................................................................................28-2
Clearing Archived Setup Data .....................................................................................28-3

A Appendix A: Calculating Tank Tilt - International
Entering the Tank Tilt Value ................................................................................. A-3

B Appendix B: Setup Parameters for TLS-300 System - International
System Setup ............................................................................................................... B-1
Comm Board (1, 2, etc.) Setup ..................................................................................... B-2
In-Tank Setup ............................................................................................................... B-2
Leak Test Method Setup ............................................................................................... B-3

C Appendix C: Setup Parameters for TLS-350 System - International

Figures
Figure 4-1.

Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-3.

Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location TLS-300 Console .................................................................................4-3
Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location TLS-350 Consoles with CPU Board ....................................................4-4
Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location TLS-350 Consoles with ECPU Board ..................................................4-5
Relative Positions of Tank Alarm Limits ............................................7-14
Siphon Manifolded Tanks ..................................................................7-20
Line Manifolding A Siphon Manifolded Set To A Single Tank ...............7-21

Table 2-1.Table 5-1.Table 6-1.Table 6-2.
Table 7-1.Table 7-2.Table 10-1.Table 12-1.Table A-1.Table B-1.
Table B-2.
Table B-3.
Table B-4.
Table C-1.
Table C-2.
Table C-3.
Table C-4.
Table C-5.

Character Assignments for Numeric Keys .............................................2-4
Alarm Labels ........................................................................................5-21
SiteLink Modem Default Port Settings ....................................................6-1
Alarm List .............................................................................................6-21
Typical Thermal Coefficients ..................................................................7-3
Tank Tilt Calculation Worksheet ...........................................................7-19
Reference of Absolute Pressure Offsets at Various Altitudes ..............10-8
Submersible Pump Nominal Pressures ................................................12-4
Typical Tank Offset Values ................................................................... A-1
System Setup ........................................................................................ B-1
Comm Board Setup ............................................................................... B-2
In-tank Setup ......................................................................................... B-2
Leak Test Method Setup ....................................................................... B-3
System Setup ........................................................................................C-1
Comm Board (1, 2, Etc.) Setup ............................................................. C-2
In-tank Setup ......................................................................................... C-3
Leak Test Method Setup .......................................................................C-4
Reconciliation Setup .............................................................................. C-5

Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-3.

Tables

xii

1

Introduction

This manual lists programming instructions for every available TLS-3XX Console Setup Function. The manual is
divided into sections for each Setup Function beginning with Section 5, System Setup. Depending on your
console type and its installed features, you may only see (and be able to program) some of the Functions and/or
Steps. Skip over the material in this manual that does not apply to your particular installation. You cannot perform
these setup procedures until the console, probes, and sensors have been installed and connected.

Contractor Certification Requirements
Veeder-Root requires the following minimum training certifications for contractors who will install and setup the
equipment discussed in this manual:
Installer (Level 1) Certification: Contractors holding valid Installer Certification are approved to perform wiring
and conduit routing; equipment mounting; probe, sensor and carbon canister vapor polisher installation; wireless
equipment installation; tank and line preparation; and line leak detector installation.
ATG Technician (Level 2/3 or 4) Certification: Contractors holding valid ATG Technician Certifications are
approved to perform installation checkout, startup, programming and operations training, system tests,
troubleshooting and servicing for all Veeder-Root Series Tank Monitoring Systems, including Line Leak Detection.
In addition, Contractors with the following sub-certification designations are approved to perform installation
checkout, startup, programming, system tests, troubleshooting, service techniques and operations training on the
designated system.
• Wireless 2
• Tall Tank
VR Vapor Products Certification: Contractors holding a certification with the following designations are
approved to perform installation checkout, startup, programming, system tests, troubleshooting, service techniques
and operations training on the designated system.
• ISD – In Station Diagnostics
• PMC – Pressure Management Control
• CCVP - Veeder-Root Vapor Polisher
• Wireless – ISD/PMC Wireless
• A current Veeder-Root Technician Certification is a prerequisite for the VR Vapor Products course.
Warranty Registrations may only be submitted by selected Distributors.

Related Manuals
576013-610

TLS-3XX Series Consoles Operator’s Manual

576013-879

TLS-3XX Series Consoles Site Prep Manual

577013-874

Maintenance Service Code Quick Help

1-1

1 Introduction

Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions
The following safety symbols may be used in this manual to alert you to important safety hazards and precautions.

OFF

EXPLOSIVE
Fuels and their vapors are extremely
explosive if ignited.

FLAMMABLE
Fuels and their vapors are extremely
flammable.

TURN POWER OFF
Live power to a device creates a
potential shock hazard. Turn Off power
to the device and associated accessories when servicing the unit.

READ ALL RELATED MANUALS
Knowledge of all related procedures
before you begin work is important.
Read and understand all manuals thoroughly. If you do not understand a procedure, ask someone who does.

ELECTRICITY
High voltage exists in, and is supplied
to, the device. A potential shock hazard
exists.

WARNING
Heed the adjacent instructions to avoid
damage to equipment, property, environment or personal injury.

Safety Warnings

WARNING
This system operates near highly combustible fuel storage tanks.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS AND SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, ENVIRONMENT,
RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
Leaking tanks can create serious environmental and health hazards. Improper
programming and operation may also result in equipment self-test failures and
submersible pump shutdowns. It is the owner’s responsibility to:
1. Ensure that this equipment is properly programmed.
2. Promptly investigate any alarm conditions.
3. Operate this equipment in accordance with the instructions in this manual.

1-2

2

Front Panel Keypads

You use the front panel keypads to enter information into the system.

Arrangement of Keys
The keypads (see Figure 2-1) consist of two groups of 12 keys. The functions for each key have been established
to make movement within the setup mode, entry of setup data, and selection of setup choices as simple as
possible
.

2
consoles\keypad.eps

MODE

BACKUP

FUNCTTION

PRINT

CHANGE

STEP

PAPER
FEED

ENTER

TANK
SENSOR

1

ABC

DEF

1

2

3

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

5

6

PRS

TUV

WXY

7

8

9

QZ.

ALARM
TEST

,

4

+/-

0
3

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. Maintenance Report (white) key
2. Maintenance Tracker (blue) key

3. Alphanumeric keypad
4. Operating keypad
Figure 2-1. Console Keypads

OPERATING KEYS
The 12 left-hand keys are operating keys. They allow you to access and print data, start and stop in-tank leak test
procedures, program the system, test system operation and review diagnostic information. (See “Using the
Operating Keys” on page 2-2.)

ALPHANUMERIC KEYS
The 12 right-hand keys have alphanumeric and cursor movement functions for entering setup information.

2-1

2 Front Panel Keypads

Using the Operating Keys

If a numeric value is required for entry of a particular setup parameter, the keys provide only numeric functions. If
either alphabetic or numeric characters may be entered, the keys provide both alphabetic and numeric functions.
(See “Using the Alphanumeric Keys” on page 2-3).

BLUE KEY (MAINTENANCE TRACKER - TLS-350 ONLY)
Contractor plugs a valid ID Key into the TLS and presses the blue key to log in for a work session. Note: This key
is available in consoles with Version 27 and higher software. In addition to certain hardware requirements, the
Maintenance Tracker feature must be enabled for this key to function.

WHITE KEY (MAINTENANCE REPORT - TLS-350 ONLY)
Press the white key to printout up to the last 75 maintenance history records. Additional records going back up to
3 years are also selectable. Note: This key is available in consoles with Version 27 and higher software and is
functional only if the Maintenance History or Maintenance Tracker feature enabled.

Using the Operating Keys
Operating key functions are summarized below.
ALARM/TEST
ALARM
TEST

Shuts off audible alarm and clears alarms that have returned to normal condition. Will not shut off
display indicators or disable alarm function. If your system has a printer, it will print an alarm or
warning report when this button is pressed.
Used to activate and de-activate output relays when OUTPUT RELAY TEST function is used.
MODE

MODE

Select operating modes: Normal Mode, Setup Mode, Diagnostic Mode.
If MODE is pressed while in a Function or Step, the system will advance to the next MODE.

FUNCTION
FUNCTION

The FUNCTION key is used to scroll through and access functions within a MODE.
If FUNCTION is pressed while in a STEP, the system will advance to the next FUNCTION.

STEP
Use the STEP key to move from one procedure to the next within a FUNCTION.
STEP

2-2

2 Front Panel Keypads

Using the Alphanumeric Keys

TANK/SENSOR
TANK
SENSOR

The TANK/SENSOR key is used to advance by tank or sensor through setup procedures or displayed data.

CHANGE
CHANGE

CHANGE is used in Normal and Setup modes to enter data, revise existing data or change an
entry.

ENTER
ENTER

ENTER completes a selection or enters data into a function. It is also used to start certain functions such as leak tests.

BACKUP
BACKUP

BACKUP lets you move back through STEPS, FUNCTIONS and MODES to access data or
entries you have already passed in the normal progression. It eliminates the need to move completely through a function or mode to access a step recently passed.
BACKUP will move through the hierarchy of commands as follows: through STEPS within a
FUNCTION to that FUNCTION; then back through FUNCTIONS to MODE; then back through
MODES.
PRINT

PRINT

Press PRINT to generate inventory, delivery, leak test, status, setup, diagnostic and alarm history
reports.

Using the Alphanumeric Keys
You use alphanumeric keys to enter data during the setup process. When a numeric value is required (i.e.gallons,
time, etc.), the keys provide only a numeric function. When you can enter either alphabetic or numeric characters
(i.e. station headers, sensor locations, etc.), the keys provide both functions.

2-3

2 Front Panel Keypads

Using the Alphanumeric Keys

ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC DATA
Keys 0 through 9 provide both alphabetic and numeric capability by activating each character shown on the key
with successive pushes of the key. Table 2-1 shows characters assigned to each of the numeric keys for all
languages except Japanese, Russian, Turkish, and Greek.
Table 2-1.- Character Assignments for Numeric Keys
Key

1st Key Press

2nd Key Press

3rd Key Press

4th Key Press

5th Key Press

Key 0

‘space’

‘-’

‘,’

‘0’

‘*’

Key 1

‘Q’

‘Z’

‘.’

‘1’

‘&’1

Key 2

‘A’

‘B’

‘C’

‘2’

‘=’1

Key 3

‘D’

‘E’

‘F’

‘3’

‘%’1

Key 4

‘G’

‘H’

‘I’

‘4’

Key 5

‘J’

‘K’

‘L’

‘5’

Key 6

‘M’

‘N’

‘O’

‘6’

Key 7

‘P’

‘R’

‘S’

‘7’

Key 8

‘T’

‘U’

‘V’

‘8’

Key 9

‘W’

‘X’

‘Y’

‘9’

1Character

only available when entering the Modem Setup String.

For example, to enter an “A” in a station header, which accepts either alphabetic or numeric characters, you press
the
key once. Push the key again to change the character to a “B”, again to enter a “C”, and again to enter a “2”.
The period (.) is on key “1”.
When the correct selection is displayed, press the
key to move the cursor to the next position and enter the
required character as described. When all the characters have been entered, press ENTER.
If you enter an incorrect character, you may use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the character, press
CHANGE, and enter the correct character.

SPECIAL CHARACTERS AND CURSOR MOVEMENT
Several keys let you enter special characters and move the cursor as follows:

,

0

The Zero key has a comma (,) plus two special characters that can be used in making alphanumeric
entries. They are:
= Space (no character)
— = Dash (a “*” character is generated by pressing this key 5 times).

2-4

2 Front Panel Keypads

Using the Alphanumeric Keys

The Right-Arrow key lets you advance the cursor to the right when making alphanumeric entries
such as station headers and when selecting certain parameters such as module configurations.
The step-by-step setup instructions will identify when this function should be used. The . (decimal)
is used in numeric entries as required. It is not used as a period for text entries.

The Left-Arrow key lets you move the cursor to the left.
The +/- is used to identify a positive or negative value.

+/-

2-5

3

Setup Mode Organization

The Setup Mode is used to enter information and operating parameters that govern the way your system monitors
your installation. Setup data is entered via the front panel keypads. The previous section describes in detail the
functions of each key.

Functions
Functions are the major groups in the Setup Mode of the console.
IMPORTANT! The list below contains all of the available Setup Mode functions. However, only the functions
relevant to your console and its installed options and connected detection systems will be accessible in setup.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

System Setup
Communications Setup
In-Tank Setup
Fuel Management Setup
In-Tank Leak Test Setup
Pressure Line Leak Setup
WPLLD Line Leak Setup
Line Leak Detector Setup [VLLD]
Line Leak Test Setup
Line Leak Lockout Setup
Pump Sensor Setup
Pump Relay Monitor Setup
Reconciliation Setup
Liquid Sensor Setup
Vapor Sensor Setup
Groundwater Sensor Setup
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup
3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup
External Input Setup
Output Relay Setup
PLLD Line Disable Setup
WPLLD Line Disable Setup
Line Disable Setup [VLLD]
Smart Sensor Setup
VMC Setup
Archive Utility

Steps
Within each FUNCTION are STEPS at which you enter setup data.

Setup Mode Programming Table
The table below takes you through the complete setup mode as it appears in the console display with all features
installed (all choices may not appear on your TLS). Always press the ENTER key after entering data. If you press
the STEP, FUNCTION, or MODE key without pressing ENTER, the data will not be saved. It is a good idea to print

3-1

3 Setup Mode Organization

Setup Mode Programming Table

a setup report for record keeping purposes after completing your system’s setup. In the System Setup Table
below, ↓FUNCTION or ↓STEP refers to pressing that key on the front panel.
Setup Mode Table

↓FUNCTION

SYSTEM SETUP
↓STEP
System Language - English/ and second language as ordered
↓STEP
System Units (U.S./Metric/Imperial Gallons)
↓STEP
Date/Time Format
↓STEP
Set Month Day Year
↓STEP
Set Time
↓STEP
Station Header Line 1 (Line 2/Line 3/Line 4)
↓STEP
Shift #1 Start Time (Shift 2/Shift 3/Shift 4)
↓STEP
Shift BIR Printouts (Enable/Disable)
↓STEP
Daily BIR Printouts (Enable/Disable)
↓STEP
Ticketed Delivery (Enable/Disable)
↓STEP
TC Ticketed Delivery (Enable/Disable)
↓STEP
Close Day Of Week
↓STEP
Daily Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Weekly Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Periodic Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Daily Book Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Weekly Book Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Periodic Book Dlvy Var Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Daily Var Analy Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Weekly Var Analy Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Periodic Var Analy Rpts (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Tank Per Tst Needed Wrn (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Tank Per Tst Needed Wrn Days
↓STEP
Tank Per Tst Needed Alm Days
↓STEP
Tank Ann Tst Needed Wrn Days
↓STEP
Tank Ann Tst Needed Alm Days
↓STEP
Line Reenable Method (Pass Line Test/Alarm Acknowledge)
↓STEP
Line Per Tst Needed Wrn (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Line Per Tst Needed Wrn Days
↓STEP
Line Per Tst Needed Alm Days
↓STEP
Line Ann Tst Needed Wrn (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Line Ann Tst Needed Wrn Days
↓STEP
Line Ann TsT Needed ALM Days
↓STEP
Remote Printer Page Eject
↓STEP
Print Tc Volume
↓STEP
Temp Compensation
↓STEP
Tanker Load Report
↓STEP
Stick Height Offset (Disable/Enable)
↓STEP
Ullage (90%/95%)
↓STEP
H-Protocol Data Format
↓STEP
Precision Test Duration (12 - 744 hrs [w/o CSLD]/12 - 744 hrs [w/CSLD])

3-2

3 Setup Mode Organization

↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP

Setup Mode Programming Table

0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Test Auto-Confirm (Enable/Disable)
0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Test Auto-Confirm (Enable/Disable)
Daylight Savings Time (Disable/Enable)
HRM-QPLD Printouts (Enable/Disable)
Re-direct Local PrintouT (Enable/Disable)
Euro Protocol Prefix
Bdim Trans Alarm Delay
System Security Code
Maintenance History (Enable/Disable)
Tank Chart Security
Custom Alarms
Service Notice
System Beeper
Mass/Density
Fiscal Height Security

↓FUNCTION

COMMUNICATION SETUP
↓STEP
Comm Board Port Settings - Repeat for each board (Baud Rate/Parity/Stop Bit/Data Length/
Dial Type/Answer On/Code/Modem Setup String/Dial Tone Interval/DTR Normal State
↓STEP
Auto Transmit Setup (Transmit Message Setup/Auto-Transmit Delay Time/Auto-Transmit Repeat
Time)
↓STEP
Phone Directory Setup
↓STEP
Auto Dial Setup
↓STEP
Auto Dial Alarm
↓STEP
RS-232 End Of Message

↓FUNCTION

IN-TANK SETUP
↓STEP
Tank Config Module 1 (Up To 3)
↓STEP
Product Label
↓STEP
Product Code
↓STEP
Thermal Coeff.
↓STEP
Tank Density
↓STEP
Tank Diameter
↓STEP
Tank Profile (1 Pt/4 Pts/20 Pts/linear/50 Pts)
↓STEP
Full Volume
↓STEP
Meter Data Present
↓STEP
Vapor Loss Factor
↓STEP
End Factor (None/Flat/Hemispherical/Other)
↓STEP
End Value
↓STEP
Calibration Update
↓STEP
Float Size
↓STEP
Water Warning Limit (Not Active For Tanks With High Alcohol Probes)
↓STEP
High Water Limit (Not Active For Tanks With High Alcohol Probes)
↓STEP
Water Alarm Filter (Not Active For Tanks With High Alcohol Probes)
↓STEP
Max Or Label Volume
↓STEP
Overfill Limit
↓STEP
High Product
↓STEP
Delivery Limit

3-3

3 Setup Mode Organization

↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP

Setup Mode Programming Table

Low Product
Leak Alarm Unit
Sudden Loss Limit
Tank Tilt
Probe Offset
Siphon Manifolded
Line Manifolded
Leak Minimum Periodic
Leak Minimum Annual
Periodic Test Type
Annual Test Fail Alarm
Periodic Test Fail Alarm
Gross Test Fail Alarm
Annual Test Averaging
Periodic Test Averaging
Tank Test Notify
Tank Test Siphon Break
Stick Offset
Delivery Delay
Pump Threshold

↓FUNCTION

FUEL MANAGEMENT SETUP
↓STEP
Delivery Warn Days XX.X
↓STEP
Fuel Management Auto Print
↓STEP
Average Daily Sales

↓FUNCTION

IN-TANK LEAK TEST SETUP
↓STEP
Test Method (Single Tank/All Tanks)
↓STEP
Test Frequency (On Date/Annually [Month/Week, Day]/Monthly [Week, Day]/Weekly [Day]/
Daily/ Auto [If line leak or pump sense]/CSLD - if enabled [Prob. Detect.(9%/99%)]/Climate
Factor [Moderate/Extreme])
↓STEP
Gross Test Auto-Confirm (If CSLD select with Pump Sense)
↓STEP
Test Start Time
↓STEP
Leak Test Rate (0.2gph [0.76 lph]/0.1 gph [0.38 lph])
↓STEP
Test Duration
↓STEP
Leak Test Early Stop
↓STEP
Report Only - if CSLD selected (Disabled/End of Month/Day 15 and End of Month/Day 25 and
End of Month)
↓STEP
Leak Test Report Format (Normal/Enhanced)

↓FUNCTION

PRESSURE LINE LEAK SETUP
↓STEP
Line Config. - Module 1 ( up to 3)
↓STEP
Pressure Line Label
↓STEP
Piping Type
↓STEP
Line Length
↓STEP
User Defined Pipe Type - If selected in Piping Type (1st Line Length/2nd Line Length - if necessary/1st Bulk Modulus/2nd Bulk Modulus- if necessary/Thermal Coeff.)
↓STEP
Thermal Coefficient - If certain piping types selected
↓STEP
0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling (Disabled/Repetitive/Monthly/Manual)

3-4

3 Setup Mode Organization

↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP
↓STEP

Setup Mode Programming Table

0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test SchedulingTest (Disabled/Repetitive/Auto/Manual)
Passive 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Testing (if certain pipe type selections made and 0.1 gph
line leak test shedule selection is auto)
Shutdown Rate (3.0 gph [11.3 lph]/0.2 gph [0.76lph]/0.1 gph [0.38 lph]/None)
Low Pressure Alarm Shutoff (No/Select Value)
Select Tank - in which PLLD controlled pump is installed (None/Select Number)
Dispense Mode (Standard/Manifold:Alternate/Manifold:Sequential/Manifold:All Pumps)
Pressure Transducer (Non-Vented/Vented/High Pressure)
Pressure Offset Value
Mechanical Blender
Blend Partners

↓FUNCTION

WPLLD LINE LEAK SETUP
↓STEP
Line Config. Module 1 ( up to 3)
↓STEP
WPLLD Line Label
↓STEP
Piping Type
↓STEP
Line Length
↓STEP
0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Test (Disabled/Repetitive/Monthly/Manual)
↓STEP
0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Test (Disabled/Auto/Manual)
↓STEP
Shutdown Rate (3.0 gph [11.3 lph]/0.2 gph [0.76lph]/0.1 gph [0.38 lph]/None)
↓STEP
Dispense Mode (Standard/Manifold:Alternate/Manifold:Sequential/Manifold:All Pumps)
↓STEP
Pressure Offset Value

↓FUNCTION

LINE LEAK DETECTOR SETUP (Volumetric)
↓STEP
Line Config. Module 1 ( up to 8)
↓STEP
Enter Pipe Label
↓STEP
Tank #
↓STEP
Dispense Mode (Standard/Manifold:Alternate/Manifold:Sequential/Manifold:All Pumps)
↓STEP
Fuel Type (Gasoline/Diesel)
↓STEP
2-inch (50mm) Piping Length
↓STEP
3-inch (76mm) Piping Length
↓STEP
Pipe Type (Steel/Fiberglass/2-wall Fiberglass/Flexible)
↓STEP
Pump Pressure
↓STEP
Shutdown Rate (3.0 gph [11.3 lph]/0.2 gph [0.76lph]/0.1 gph [0.38 lph])
↓STEP
Pumpside Test
↓STEP
Wait Mode (Temp. Meas./Vol. Chg. Meas.)
↓STEP
NPB Partner

↓FUNCTION

LINE LEAK TEST SETUP
↓STEP
Leak Test Method (All Lines/Single Line)
↓STEP
Test Frequency (On Date/Annually [Month/ Week, Day]/Monthly [Week, Day]/ Weekly [Day]/
Daily)
↓STEP
Leak Test Start Time
↓STEP
Test Rate (0.2 gph [0.76 lph]/0.1 gph [0.38 lph])

↓FUNCTION

LINE LEAK LOCKOUT SETUP
↓STEP
Lockout Schedule (Daily [Start Time/Stop Time]/ Individual [Start Day/Time/Stop Day/Time])

3-5

3 Setup Mode Organization

Setup Mode Programming Table

↓FUNCTION

PUMP SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Pump Sense Config. Module 1 ( up to 8)
↓STEP
Select Tank
↓STEP
Dispense Mode (Standard/Manifold:Alternate/Manifold:Sequential/Manifold:All Pumps)

↓FUNCTION

PUMP RELAY MONITOR SETUP
↓STEP
Pump Relay Config. Module 1 ( up to 8)
↓STEP
Enter Pump Monitor Label
↓STEP
Select Pump Relay (None/PumpSense/PLLD/WPLLD/VLLD/Relay [Pump Control Output
only])
↓STEP
Stuck Delay - 5 - 600 sec (Visible only if Relay assigned)
↓STEP
Select Max Run Time - 1 - 24 hr (Visible If None was selected for Pump Relay)

↓FUNCTION

RECONCILIATION SETUP
↓STEP
Dispenser Module Data String
↓STEP
Automatic Daily Closing Time
↓STEP
Auto Shift #1 Closing Time
↓STEP
Auto Shift #2 Closing Time
↓STEP
Auto Shift #3 Closing Time
↓STEP
Auto Shift #4 Closing Time
↓STEP
Periodic Reconciliation Mode (Monthly/Rolling [Length])
↓STEP
Periodic Reconciliation Alarm (Disabled/Enabled)
↓STEP
Periodic Reconciliation Alarm Threshold
↓STEP
Periodic Reconciliation Offset
↓STEP
Remote Report Format (Line/Column)
↓STEP
Temp Compensation (Standard/TC Vol)
↓STEP
Meter Calibration Offset
↓STEP
Modify Tank/Meter Map

↓FUNCTION

LIQUID SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Sensor Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Sensor Location
↓STEP
Sensor Types (Tri-State/NC/Dual Float Hydrostatic/Dual Float Discriminating/Dual Float High
Vapor/Interceptor)
↓STEP
Category (Annular Space/Dispenser Pan/Monitor Well/STP Sump/Piping Sump/Other)

↓FUNCTION

VAPOR SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Sensor Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Sensor Location
↓STEP
Sensor Threshold
↓STEP
Category (Annular Space/Dispenser Pan/Monitor Well/STP Sump/Piping Sump/Other)

↓FUNCTION

GROUNDWATER SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Sensor Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Sensor Location
↓STEP
Category (Annular Space/Dispenser Pan/Monitor Well/STP Sump/Piping Sump/Other)

3-6

3 Setup Mode Organization

Setup Mode Programming Table

↓FUNCTION

2-WIRE CL SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Sensor Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Sensor Location
↓STEP
Sensor Types (Discrim. Interstitial/Ultra 2)
↓STEP
Category (Annular Space/Dispenser Pan/Monitor Well/STP Sump/Piping Sump/Other)

↓FUNCTION

3-WIRE CL SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
Sensor Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Sensor Location
↓STEP
Sensor Mode (Standard/High Vapor)
↓STEP
Category (Annular Space/Dispenser Pan/Monitor Well/STP Sump/Piping Sump/Other)

↓FUNCTION

EXTERNAL INPUT SETUP
↓STEP
Input Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Input Name
↓STEP
External Input Type (Standard [NO/NC]/Generator [Select Orientation (NO/NC)/Generator
Tank [All Tanks/By Tank]/Pump Sense [Select Orientation (NO/NC)/Select Tank (Tank #/
None)/Dispense Mode [Standard/Manifold:Alternate/Manifold:Sequential/Manifold:All
Pumps])
↓STEP
Standard ACK (NO/NC)

↓FUNCTION

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
↓STEP
Relay Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Enter Relay Designation
↓STEP
Select Relay Type (Standard [NO/NC]/Pump Control Output [Select Tank (None/Tank #)]/
Momentary [NO/NC]/Pump Comm Control [Select Tank (None/Tank #)])
↓STEP
Relay Assignments - for each relay except Pump Comm Control types (In-Tank Alarms [None/
All /Single]/ Liquid Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Vapor Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]]/
External Inputs [None/All /Single]]/ Line Leak Alarms - VLLD [None/All /Single]/ Groundwater
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 2-Wire CL (Type A) Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 3-Wire CL (Type B)
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Power Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Reconciliation Alarms
[None/All /Single]/ PLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ WPLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Comm
Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Pump Relay Monitor Alarms [None/All /Single]

↓FUNCTION

PLLD LINE DISABLE SETUP
↓STEP
Relay Assignments - for each relay except Pump Comm Control types (In-Tank Alarms [None/
All /Single]/ Liquid Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Vapor Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]]/
External Inputs [None/All /Single]]/ Line Leak Alarms - VLLD [None/All /Single]/ Groundwater
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 2-Wire CL (Type A) Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 3-Wire CL (Type B)
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Power Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Reconciliation Alarms
[None/All /Single]/ PLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ WPLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Comm
Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Pump Relay Monitor Alarms [None/All /Single]

↓FUNCTION

WPLLD LINE DISABLE SETUP
↓STEP
Relay Assignments - for each relay except Pump Comm Control types (In-Tank Alarms [None/
All /Single]/ Liquid Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Vapor Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]]/
External Inputs [None/All /Single]]/ Line Leak Alarms - VLLD [None/All /Single]/ Groundwater
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 2-Wire CL (Type A) Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 3-Wire CL (Type B)
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Power Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Reconciliation Alarms
[None/All /Single]/ PLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ WPLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Comm
Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Pump Relay Monitor Alarms [None/All /Single]

3-7

3 Setup Mode Organization

Setup Mode Programming Table

↓FUNCTION

LINE DISABLE SETUP (VLLD)
↓STEP
Relay Assignments - for each relay except Pump Comm Control types (In-Tank Alarms [None/
All /Single]/ Liquid Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Vapor Sensor Alarms [None/All /Single]]/
External Inputs [None/All /Single]]/ Groundwater Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 2-Wire CL (Type
A) Alarms [None/All /Single]/ 3-Wire CL (Type B) Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Power Side DIM
Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Reconciliation Alarms [None/All /Single]/ PLLD Alarms [None/All /
Single]/ WPLLD Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Comm Side DIM Alarms [None/All /Single]/ Pump
Relay Monitor Alarms [None/All /Single]

↓FUNCTION

SMART SENSOR SETUP
↓STEP
SS Config. - Module 1 (up to 8)
↓STEP
Enter SmartSensor Label
↓STEP
Select SS Category (Air Flow Meter[ISD System Device - ref. manual 577013-800]/ Vapor
Pressure [ISD System Device - ref. manual 577013-800]/ Mag Sensor/ Vac Sensor/ ATMP
Sensor/ Uknown)

↓FUNCTION

VMC SETUP
↓STEP
Add/Edit/Remove VMC Serial Number

↓FUNCTION

ARCHIVE UTILITY
↓STEP
Save Setup Data
↓STEP
Restore Setup Data
↓STEP
Clear Setup Data

3-8

4

Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Please read this section before applying AC power to the console.

Security Code Enable/Disable
Access to all setup functions through either the front panel and/or the RS-232 interface can be restricted by the
use of security codes. Once this feature has been activated, only persons knowing the user-designated codes may
enter or change any setup values.
This feature will prevent unauthorized persons from intentionally or accidentally entering or changing setup values.
Two separate Security Codes may be entered—one to restrict access to the Setup Mode from the front-panel
keyboard and another to restrict remote access through the RS-232 interface.
Open the left front panel door and locate the slide switch for the battery and the DIP switch. See appropriate
figure for your console (Figure 4-1 - Figure 4-3).

TLS-300 CONSOLES
IMPORTANT! DIP switch #2 controls the power to the front-panel display and must be in the OPEN position!
If you want to enable the security code feature and require entering of the security code(s) for front-panel and/or
RS-232 system setup access, make sure that switches #3 and/or #4 on DIP switch S2 are in the Closed position.
If you want to disable the security code feature and allow front panel and RS-232 system setup access, make sure
that switches #3 and #4 on DIP switch S2 are both in the OPEN position.

TLS-350 CONSOLES
If you want to disable the security code feature and allow front panel and RS-232 system setup access, make sure
that switches #1 and #2 on DIP switch SW2 are both in the OPEN position.
If you want to enable the security code feature and require entering of the security code(s) for front-panel and/or
RS-232 system setup access, make sure that switches #1 and/or #2 on DIP switch SW2 are in the Closed
position.
IMPORTANT! DIP switch #3 controls the power to the front-panel display and must be in the OPEN position!
When switch #3 is closed, the console display remains blank. For international operation only! - set DIP switch 3
to the Closed position to enable HRM.
DIP switch #4 is not used at this time and may be in either position. DIP switch #1 is not used at this time and
may be in either position.

4-1

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Security Code Enable/Disable

2
consoles\keypad.eps

MODE

BACKUP

FUNCTTION

PRINT

CHANGE

STEP

PAPER
FEED

ENTER

TANK
SENSOR

1

ABC

DEF

1

2

3

GHI

JKL

MNO

4

5

6

PRS

TUV

WXY

7

8

9

QZ.

ALARM
TEST

,

4

+/-

0
3

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. Maintenance Report (white) key
2. Maintenance Tracker (blue) key

3. Alphanumeric keypad
4. Operating keypad

4-2

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Security Code Enable/Disable

1

1
6

3

EN
OP

3 4
1 2

S1

2

S2

5

4

consoles\300dp1.eps

8

7

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. Battery Backup Switch (S1) shown in OFF position
2. Front Panel Security Code (DIP Switch 4)
3. RS-232 Security Code (DIP Switch 3)
4. Front Panel Display (DIP Switch 2)

5. DIP switch 1 can be in either position - It is shown in closed
position (open side up, number side down)
6. Switch (S2)
7. S1 and S2 Locations in Consoles with Through-Hole Mount
CPU Board
8. S1 and S2 Locations in Consoles with Surface Mount CPU
Board

Figure 4-1. Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location - TLS-300 Console

4-3

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Security Code Enable/Disable

1

consoles\cpubbsw1.eps

2

7
6

3

5
1 2 3 4
S2

S1
OPEN

BATT

OPEN

4
Legend for numbered boxes:
1. CPU Board
2. Front Panel Security Code (DIP Switch 1)
3. Battery Backup Switch (S1) - Shown in ON position
(up)
4. DIP switches: 1 - 4 shown in the OPEN position
(open end down, number end up)

5. DIP Switch 4 (not used)
6. Front Panel Display (DIP Switch 3)
7. RS-232 Security Code (DIP Switch 2)

Figure 4-2. Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location TLS-350 Consoles with CPU Board

4-4

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Security Code Enable/Disable

1

consoles\ecp350sw1.eps

2

7

3
4

6

1 2 3 4

OPEN

SW1

SW2

5

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. ECPU board
2. View Front Panel Display (DIP Switch 3)
3. RS-232 Security Code (DIP Switch 2)
4. Front Panel Security Code (DIP Switch 1)

5. DIP switches: 1 - 4 shown in the OPEN position (open end
down)
6. Battery Backup Switch (SW1)- Shown in OFF position
(down)
7. DIP Switch 4 (not used)

Figure 4-3. Battery Backup Switch and DIP Switch Location TLS-350 Consoles with ECPU Board

4-5

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Battery Backup

Battery Backup
The system is equipped with an internal backup battery to protect all setup and operating data in the event of an
AC-power interruption.
The system is shipped from the factory with the Battery Backup slide switch in the OFF position. Make sure this
switch is in the OFF position before applying AC power to the console.

Applying AC Power to the Console
1. Open the left front door of the console. With the Battery Backup switch in the OFF position, turn On AC power
to the console.
2. The console front panel display will cycle through the following screens: (NOTE: if you enabled the HRM
feature, the system date/time format will default to DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS).
CLEARING ALL RAM

SYSTEM COLD START

SYSTEM SELF TEST

The display below appears only if you have one of the modem modules or WPLLD installed:
WORKING
********************

SYSTEM STARTUP COMPLETE

The message below appears in consoles with Archive Utility feature only. For more information about saving and
restoring system setup data, refer to “Archive Utility” on page 28-1.
MMM DD, YYYY HH:MM:SS XM
RESTORE SETUP DATA?

At this point the ALARM audible beeper and front panel light will begin turning on and off, and the printer will
printout:
**** SYSTEM RESET ****
MMM DD, YYYY HH:MM XM

4-6

4 Prior to Applying AC Power to the Console

Applying AC Power to the Console

and the front panel display will read:
MMM DD, YYYY HH:MM:SS XM
BATTERY IS OFF

3. Press the ALARM/TEST key to silence the audible alarm. Slide the Battery Backup switch (S1 or SW1) to the
ON position. After a few seconds, the alarm light will go out and the front panel display will read:
MMM DD, YYYY HH:MM:SS XM
ALL FUNCTIONS NORMAL

4. You can now begin the System Setup procedure.

4-7

5

System Setup

Programming Guidelines
This manual details setup procedures for every available console Function within the Setup Mode. The manual is
divided into sections for each Function as they appear on the display, beginning with Section 5, System Setup
through Section 26, Archive Utility. Depending on your console type and its installed features, you may only see
(and be able to program) some of the Functions and/or Steps. Just skip over the material in this manual that
doesn’t apply to your installation. The screen examples shown in this manual, are in U.S. units. However, Metric or
Imperial units would appear if either of those choices were selected in the System Units step.

• Programming Instructions. All the programming instructions in this manual assume that this is a first-time
(cold-start) setup.

• Sample Screens. The screens that are shown in these setup procedures display factory-set values or choices.
If you change these settings as you set up the system for your application, your setup values or choices will
appear in the display when the Setup Mode is re-entered.

• Key Functions. The keys used to revise any setting are the same as used during initial programming, although
the key sequences may change.

• Multiple Choice Entries. The setup procedure mentioned in this manual instructs you to press the STEP key
to accept a default value and move to the next setup parameter. When you are offered multiple choices, press
the CHANGE key to display these alternate choices, and the ENTER key to confirm the choice you decide
upon.

Automatic Return to Operating Mode
The system will automatically return to the Operating Mode status display in 15 minutes if no activity takes place
while the system is in the Setup Mode. Mark where you are in the setup sequence if you are going to be away for
longer than this.

Setup Data Warning
When you exit the Setup Mode, a Setup Data Warning will appear in the Status Display and the yellow warning
light will flash if insufficient or invalid setup data has been entered. In systems equipped with a printer, a Setup
Data Warning report will also be printed.
The display and report will identify the source of the warning (i.e. Tank 1, Sensor 4, etc.), and the warning
indicators will remain active until the cause has been corrected.

Printing a Setup Data Report
You should print and save a setup data report once all setup procedures are complete. This report will be a record
of all setup values entered into this system and save valuable time if system memory is lost due to a simultaneous
interruption of AC and battery power, or due to a problem within the system.

5-1

5 System Setup

Selecting the System Setup Function

To print a Setup Data Report, press the MODE key to display the Setup Mode main screen (see below), then
press the PRINT key.
SETUP MODE
PRESS  TO CONT

Selecting the System Setup Function
Press MODE to select the Setup Mode, then press FUNCTION until you see the message:
SYSTEM SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

System Language
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SYSTEM LANGUAGE
ENGLISH

Once you choose a language, the system displays and prints all information in that language. Available language
choices depend on the language set specified when the system was ordered. The available language sets are:

• English/Dutch

• English/French

• English/Finnish

• English/German

• English/Greek

• English/Italian

• English/Japanese

• English/Polish

• English/Portuguese

• English/Russian

• English/Spanish

• English/Swedish

• English/Turkish
To choose English, press STEP. (The system displays the SYSTEM UNITS message.) NOTE: When using the
English/Japanese language set with a remote printer, you must set the printer’s data bit-per-character switch to 8
bits.
To choose an alternate language, press CHANGE, in response to the SYSTEM LANGUAGE message, and press
ENTER. The system displays the message:
[Selected Language]
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

System Units
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SYSTEM UNITS
U.S.

5-2

5 System Setup

Setting the Date and Time Format

You can set the system units to U.S. units (gallons, gal/hour, inches, °F), metric units (litres, litres/hour, millimeters,
°C), or imperial gallons (imperial gallons, imp. gal/hour, inches, °F). If the HRM feature was enabled, the default
units will be metric.
NOTE: If you change the System Units after entering other quantitative setup values, the system converts values to
the new units. The Date format also changes according to your selection of System Units.
To choose U.S. units, press STEP. (The system displays the SET DATE message.)
To choose metric, press CHANGE in response to the SYSTEM UNITS message and press ENTER. To choose
imperial gallons, press CHANGE twice in response to the SYSTEM UNITS message and press ENTER. The
system confirms your choice with the message:
[Selected Units]
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Setting the Date and Time Format
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SYSTEM DATE/TIME FORMAT
MON DD, YYYY HH:MM:SS xM

To accept the format shown, press STEP. (The system displays the SET TIME message).
Available date/time formats are:

• MON DD YYYY HH:MM:SS (APR 01 2002 10:02:30)
• MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS xM (04-01-02 10:02:30 AM); xM is AM or PM
• MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS (04-01-02 10:02:30)
• DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS (01-04-027 10:02:30)
• YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS (02-04-01 10:02:30)
Press CHANGE until the desired format is shown, then press ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

Current Date
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SET: MONTH DAY YEAR
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX

To accept the date shown, press STEP. (The system displays the SET TIME message).
To change the date shown, press CHANGE, enter the correct date by first entering the month then the day then
the year following the format shown on the display, then press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the
message:
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

5-3

5 System Setup

Current Time

Current Time
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SET TIME
TIME: XX:XX AM PM

To accept the time shown, press STEP. (The system displays the ENTER STATION HEADER message.)
To set a different time, press CHANGE and enter the correct time from 12:00 to 11:59 then am or pm. (Press the
Left or Right Arrow to select AM or PM). Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Report Headers
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER STATION HEADER
#1:

NOTE: The header can be up to four lines with 20 characters per line. Use the header to identify site location,
telephone number, etc. (See “Using the Alphanumeric Keys” on page 2-3 for instructions on how to enter
alphanumeric data.)
If you do not want a header for reports, press STEP. The system displays the SHIFT START TIME message.)
To create a header, press CHANGE in response to the ENTER STATION HEADER message. Enter up to 20
characters for the first line. Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
#1: [1st Line Of Header]
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

To enter additional header lines, press STEP and repeat the above procedure up to three more times for lines 2, 3,
and 4. When you finish entering the header, press STEP to continue.

Shift Start Times
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SHIFT #1 START TIME
TIME: DISABLED

Setting shift start times can ease shift changes and improve fuel inventory management. At each programmed
time, the system automatically prints a complete inventory report and stores it in memory.
NOTE: At least one Shift Start Time must be entered to activate the “Last Shift Inventory” feature. If you have fewer
than three shifts and wish to receive a day-end inventory report at the end of the final shift, use the next shift start
time as the day-end time. The system automatically prints a final inventory.

5-4

5 System Setup

Shift BIR Printouts

To leave a shift start time disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the SHIFT START TIME message for the
next shift.)
To set a start time for shift 1, press CHANGE, and enter the shift 1 start time. Press the Left or Right Arrow to
select AM or PM. Then press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX:XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the SHIFT START TIME message for the next shift:
SHIFT #2 START TIME
TIME: DISABLED

Repeat the above procedures to enter or disable start times for shifts 2, 3, and 4.

Shift BIR Printouts
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SHIFT BIR PRINTOUTS
ENABLED

Shift BIR Printouts enabled causes a BIR report to print at the end of every shift. If you want a BIR printout at the
conclusion of each shift, press STEP to continue. To disable Shift BIR Printouts, press CHANGE, ENTER, then
STEP.

Daily BIR Printouts
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
DAILY BIR PRINTOUTS
ENABLED

Daily BIR Printouts enabled causes a BIR report to print at the end of the day’s last shift. If you want a BIR
printout at the conclusion of the last shift, press STEP to continue. To disable Daily BIR Printouts, press
CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

Ticketed Delivery
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TICKETED DELIVERY
DISABLED

When you enable ticketed delivery, you can manually enter ticketed volumes using the receipts from tank delivery
trucks. To enter this data, use the Delivery Maintenance function in the Operating Mode. This feature generates
reports showing delivery variances between ticketed volume and gauged volume, book variance, and variance
analysis. To enable Ticketed Delivery, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

5-5

5 System Setup

TC Ticketed Delivery

TC Ticketed Delivery
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TC TICKETED DELIVERY
DISABLED

If you enabled ticketed delivery, you can choose whether the values you enter are standard (gross) volumes or
temperature-compensated (TC) volumes (see page 5-13 for a description of “Temperature Compensation Value”).
For standard volumes, press STEP to leave TC Ticketed Delivery disabled. For TC volumes, press CHANGE,
ENTER, then STEP.

Close Day of Week
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
CLOSE DAY OF WEEK
SUN

If you enabled ticketed delivery, you can choose the last day of the weekly cycle for Variance Reports. (Close Day
of Week is similar to “Automatic Daily Closing” on page 17-1.) Press CHANGE until the appropriate day appears,
then press ENTER and STEP.

Variance Reports
If you enabled ticketed delivery, you can print several different types of variance reports on demand from the
Reconciliation Mode (Operating Mode). Variance reports are similar to the reconciliation reports generated for BIR,
except they also show ticketed (book) delivery volume. Delivery Variance Reports show the difference between
ticketed delivery and gauged delivery volumes. Book Variance Reports show the difference between book
inventory and closing gauged volume. Variance Analysis Reports have the most detail because they summarize the
Delivery and Book Variance Reports and show tank test results, line leak test results, and corrective actions.
You must enable variance reports before you can view or print them. They are available as daily, weekly, or periodic.
The default for the period length is monthly; you can change it in “Periodic Reconciliation Mode” on page 17-2.

DAILY DELIVERY VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
DAILY DLVY VAR RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Daily Delivery Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

WEEKLY DELIVERY VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
WEEKLY DLVY VAR RPTS
DISABLED

5-6

5 System Setup

Variance Reports

To enable Weekly Delivery Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

PERIODIC DELIVERY VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PERIODIC DLVY VAR RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Periodic Delivery Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

DAILY BOOK VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
DAILY BOOK VAR RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Daily Book Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

WEEKLY BOOK VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
WEEKLY BOOK VAR RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Weekly Book Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

PERIODIC BOOK VARIANCE REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PERIODIC BOOK VAR RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Periodic Book Variance Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

DAILY VARIANCE ANALYSIS REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
DAILY VAR ANALY RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Daily Variance Analysis Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

WEEKLY VARIANCE ANALYSIS REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
WEEKLY VAR ANALY RPTS
DISABLED

5-7

5 System Setup

Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings

To enable Weekly Variance Analysis Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

PERIODIC VARIANCE ANALYSIS REPORTS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PERIODIC VAR ANALY RPTS
DISABLED

To enable Periodic Variance Analysis Reports, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP.

Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TANK PER TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

The system monitors the amount of time since the last passed 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) tank test. By enabling the Tank
Periodic Test Needed Warnings, you can have the system provide a warning when a tank test has not been
passed, or conducted in a specified number of days (0 to 30), and activate an alarm if a test has not been passed
after a warning, or a specified number of days.

ENABLE TANK PERIODIC TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To enable Tank Test Needed Periodic Warnings, press STEP. The system displays the message:
TANK PER TST NEEDED WRN
DAYS = XX

Press CHANGE, and enter the number of days (0 to 30 days) after which you want the system to warn that a tank
test has not been passed. Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
TANK PER TST NEEDED ALM
DAYS = XX

Press CHANGE, and enter the number of days (0 to 30) after which you want an alarm if a test has not been
passed. This number should be higher than the number you set for the periodic warning. Press ENTER. The
system displays the message:
DAYS = XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. (The system displays the Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings message.)

5-8

5 System Setup

Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings

DISABLE TANK PERIODIC TEST NEEDED WARNINGS
To disable Tank Periodic Test Needed Warnings, press CHANGE in response to the Tank Annual Test Needed
Warnings Enabled message. The system now displays:
TANK PER TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

Press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. (The system displays the Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings message.)

Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TANK ANN TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

The system monitors the amount of time since the last passed 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) tank test. By enabling Tank
Annual Test Needed Warnings, you can have the system provide a warning when a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) tank test
has not been passed or conducted in a specified number of days (0 to 365) and activate an alarm if a test has not
been passed after a warning, or a specified number of days.
To keep Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the Line Re-Enable
Method message.)

ENABLE TANK ANNUAL TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To enable Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings, press CHANGE. The system now displays:
TANK ANN TST NEEDED WRN
ENABLED

Press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system now displays:
TANK ANN TST NEEDED WRN
DAYS = XXX

Press CHANGE and enter the number of days after which you want the system to warn that a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph)
tank test has not been passed (0 to 365). Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

5-9

5 System Setup

Line Re-Enable Method

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
TANK ANN TST NEEDED ALM
DAYS = XXX

The default value is 355 days. If you do not want to accept the default, press CHANGE. Enter the number of days
after which you want the system to alarm if a test has not been passed (0 to 365). This number should be higher
than the number you set for periodic warning. Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. (The system displays the Line Re-Enable Method message.)

DISABLE TANK ANNUAL TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To disable Tank Annual Test Needed Warnings that are already enabled, press CHANGE in response to the Tank
Annual Test Needed Warnings Enabled message and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the
message:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP continue. (The system displays the Line Re-Enable Method message.)

Line Re-Enable Method
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
LINE RE-ENABLE METHOD
PASS LINE TEST

This feature lets you choose how to re-enable a line shut down by a failing line leak test. To re-enable a shutdown
line only by a passed line test, press STEP. (The system displays the Line Periodic Test Needed Warning.)
To re-enable a shutdown line by acknowledging the alarm that caused the shutdown, press CHANGE and the
system displays the message:
LINE RE-ENABLE METHOD
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM

Press ENTER to confirm the choice and STEP to continue.

Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
LINE PER TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

The system monitors the amount of time since the last passed 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) line test. By enabling Line
Periodic Test Needed Warnings, you can have the system provide a warning when a line test has not been passed,

5-10

5 System Setup

Line Annual Test Needed Warnings

or conducted in a specified number of days (0 to 30), and activate an alarm if a test has not been passed after a
warning, or a specified number of days.

ENABLE LINE PERIODIC TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To enable Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings, press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP. The system displays the
message:
LINE PER TST NEEDED WRN
DAYS = XXX

Press CHANGE, and enter the number of days (0 to 30 days) after which you want the system to warn that a
periodic line test has not been passed. Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
LINE PER TST NEEDED ALM
DAYS = XXX

Press CHANGE, and enter the number of days (0 to 30) after which you want the system to alarm if a test has not
been passed. This number should be higher than the number you set for the warning. Press ENTER. The system
displays the message:
DAYS = XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. (The system displays the Line Annual Warnings message.)

DISABLE LINE PERIODIC TEST NEEDED WARNINGS
To disable the line periodic warnings, press CHANGE in response to the Line Periodic Test Needed Warnings
Enabled message. The system now displays:
LINE PER TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

Press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. (The system displays the Line Annual Test Needed Warnings message.)

Line Annual Test Needed Warnings
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
LINE ANN TST NEEDED WRN
DISABLED

5-11

5 System Setup

Line Annual Test Needed Warnings

The system monitors the amount of time since the last passed 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) line test. By enabling Line Annual
Test Needed Warnings, you can have the system provide a warning when a 0.1 gph line test has not been passed,
or conducted in a specified number of days (0 to 365), and activate an alarm if a test has not been passed after a
warning, or a specified number of days.
To keep Line Annual Test Needed Warnings disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the Remote Printer Page
Eject or Print TC Volumes message.)

ENABLE LINE ANNUAL TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To enable line annual warnings, press CHANGE. The system now displays:
LINE ANN TST NEEDED WRN
ENABLED

Press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system now displays:
LINE ANN TST NEEDED WRN
DAYS = XXX

Press CHANGE and enter the number of days after which you want the system to warn that a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph)
line test has not been passed (0 to 365). Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
LINE ANN TST NEEDED ALM
DAYS = XXX

The default value is 355 days. If you do not want to accept the default, press CHANGE. Enter the number of days
after which you want the system to alarm if a test has not been passed (0 to 365). This number should be higher
than the number you set for periodic warning. Press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAYS = XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. (The system displays the Remote Printer Page Eject or Print TC Volumes message.)

DISABLE LINE ANNUAL TEST NEEDED WARNINGS AND ALARMS
To disable Line Annual Test Needed Warnings that are already enabled, press CHANGE in response to the Line
Annual Test Needed Warnings Enabled message and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the
message:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP continue. (The system displays the Remote Printer Page Eject or Print TC Volumes message.)

5-12

5 System Setup

Remote Printer Page Eject

Remote Printer Page Eject
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
REMOTE PRINTER
PAGE EJECT

NOTE: This system feature is for systems equipped with a Remote Printer Interface Module and Remote Printer
only.
Enabling this feature forces the printer to start each new report on a new page. If you disable this feature, new
reports will print continuously on the same page as the previous report.
To have each new report begin on a new page, press CHANGE in response to the REMOTE PRINTER PAGE
EJECT message. Then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
PAGE EJECT ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Print TC Volumes
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PRINT TC VOLUMES
ENABLED

Use this display to enable or disable the display and printout of TC volumes. Press STEP to accept or CHANGE
and ENTER to disable this feature. The system confirms your choice with the message:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Temperature Compensation Value
The system allows you to enter the temperature compensation (TC) reference temperature for all volume
calculations. This temperature is determined by your location. In the U.S., the reference temperature used to
calculate TC volume is normally 60°F. In other countries, this value may differ. Canada, for example, uses 15°C.
Press STEP to display the message:
TEMP COMPENSATION
VALUE (DEG F): +060.0

TLS-350R only—If BIR is being used and the meters reporting the sales are temperature compensated, the value
you enter must match the meters’ reference temperature value. Also, in BIR setup, Temp Compensation must be
set to TC VOLUME (see “Temp Compensation” on page 17-4).
LEAK CALCULATIONS NOTE: All leak calculations are based on the reference temperature you enter.
DENSITY CALCULATIONS NOTE: If you are using the Density/Mass feature, the reference temperature entered
here is used in Density reporting.
To accept the default value of 60°F (15.6°C), press STEP.

5-13

5 System Setup

Tanker Load Report - International Option

To enter a different TC reference temperature, press CHANGE. Enter a value between 0 and 120°F (-17 to
+49°C). Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
VALUE (DEG F): +(TC Value)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Tanker Load Report - International Option
The Tanker Load Report is an optional feature. In the ENABLE position, a report is printed after every tanker load is
dispensed.
Press STEP to display the message:
TANKER LOAD REPORT
ENABLE

Press CHANGE to select DISABLE, then ENTER to not automatically print this report. See the Operating Mode
charts in the Operator’s Manual to print out a report when you want it.

Stick Height Offset - International Option
The Stick Height Offset is a “reference only” height reading that allows a user- programmable offset to be entered
that makes the probe height reading “appear” to be the same as the stick height reading. Stick height offset will
not be used for volume calculation. If this feature is enabled, you must enter the stick height offset for each tank in
the In-Tank Setup section of this manual (“Stick Offset (International Option)” on page 7-24).
Press STEP to display the message:
STICK HEIGHT OFFSET
DISABLED

Press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP to enable this feature, or Press STEP to leave it disabled and continue.

Ullage
Tank Ullage can be changed from the default value of 90 percent to 95 percent as required.
Press STEP to display the message:
ULLAGE
90 PERCENT

Press CHANGE, ENTER, then STEP to select 95%, or Press STEP to leave it at 90% and continue.

H-Protocol Data Format - International Option
This feature is available only if there is an RS-232 or modem module installed in the console and H-protocol is
used.

5-14

5 System Setup

Precision Test Duration (PLLD/WPLLD Only)

Press STEP to display the message:
H-PROTOCOL DATA FORMAT
HEIGHT

This option allows either Tank Height or Tank Volume data for H-protocol. On power up, this feature will default to
HEIGHT for backward compatibility. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to change the default. Accept the default if you
are not using H-protocol.

Precision Test Duration (PLLD/WPLLD Only)
When optional 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) [PLLD and WPLLD] and 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) [PLLD only] line leak tests are
enabled, this feature lets you extend the time between a passed test and running the next test from 12 hours (60
hours with CSLD option), up to a maximum of 744 hours (31 days).
Press STEP to display the message:
PRECISION TEST DURATION
HOURS: XXX

Press CHANGE, then enter the desired duration (from 12 up to 744 hours without the CSLD option, or from 60
up to 744 hours with the CSLD option), then press ENTER.

Precision Line Test Auto-Confirm
These Auto-Confirm selections reduce the risks of false 0.2 and 0.1 gph (0.76 and 0.38 lph) line test results.
However, enabling these options extends the time it takes to post line test results.
Press STEP to display the message:
0.2 GPH LINE TEST
AUTO-CONFIRM: ENABLED

This feature evaluates several individual 0.2 gph line tests before a result is posted. To leave Auto-Confirm
enabled, press STEP: To disable Auto-Confirm, press CHANGE, ENTER.
Press STEP to display the message:
0.1 GPH LINE TEST
AUTO-CONFIRM: ENABLED

This feature evaluates several individual 0.1 gph line tests before a result is posted. To leave Auto-Confirm
enabled, press STEP: To disable Auto-Confirm, press CHANGE, ENTER.
Press STEP to display the message:
PRINT PRECISION LINE
TEST RESULTS: DISABLED

To leave the printing of 0.2 and 0.1 gph test results disabled, press STEP: To enable these printouts, press
CHANGE, ENTER.

5-15

5 System Setup

Daylight Savings Time

Daylight Savings Time
This feature allows you to enter Daylight Savings Start and End Dates/Times. Once enabled, the console will
automatically adjust for daylight savings time on the dates and times you enter here.
Press STEP to display the message:
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME
DISABLED

To leave Daylight Savings Time disabled, press STEP. To enable Daylight Savings Time, press CHANGE, ENTER,
then STEP to display the Start Date message:
START DATE
APR WEEK 1 SUN

Press CHANGE then ENTER to select another start date. Press ENTER to accept your selected Start Date. The
Start Time message appears:
START TIME
TIME: 02:00 AM

Press CHANGE then ENTER to select another Start Time. Press ENTER to accept your selected Start Time. The
End Date message appears:
END DATE
OCT WEEK 6 SUN

Press CHANGE then ENTER to select another End Date. Press ENTER to accept your selected End Date. The
End Time message appears:
END TIME
TIME: 02:00 AM

Press CHANGE then ENTER to select another End Time. Press ENTER to accept your selected End Time.

Re-direct Local Printout
This feature is available only if there is an RS-232 or DIM card installed in the console and Gilbarco protocol is
used.
Press STEP to display the message:
RE-DIRECT LOCAL PRINTOUT
DISABLED

This option allows you to send a printout to Gilbarco’s printer instead of to the console’s printer. The default for
this feature is DISABLED. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to change the default to ENABLED. Accept the default if
you are not using Gilbarco protocol.

5-16

5 System Setup

QPLD Monthly Printout - International Option

QPLD Monthly Printout - International Option
When the HRM feature is enabled, QPLD is automatically enabled and it will print out a report once a month. If this
report is not required it may be disabled as follows.
Press STEP to display the message:
QPLD MONTHLY PRINTOUT
ENABLED

Press CHANGE to disable the report, then press ENTER.

Euro Protocol Prefix
This feature is for European applications only. If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
EURO PROTOCOL PREFIX
S

Accept the default S for the standard Euro Protocol command response prefix. Press CHANGE, then ENTER, to
select d which is a special Euro Protocol command prefix.

BDIM Trans Alarm Delay
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
BDIM TRANS ALARM DELAY
HOURS: 024

BDIM Transaction Alarm Delay is available only if there is a Block DIM card installed in the console. This feature
lets you enter a delay (of from 5 to 999 hours) before posting a Block DIM Transaction Alarm. Press CHANGE,
enter the desired delay, then press ENTER to confirm your choice. Enter 000 to disable this feature.

System Security Code
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SYSTEM SECURITY
CODE: 000000

The System Security Code is a 6-digit numeric code which should be known only to personnel responsible for the
setup, management, and service of the system. If you enable the System Security Code, you will be required to
enter this code before you can access any setup or diagnostic function.
If you do not want to enable the Security Code, the system setup is complete. Press FUNCTION to exit the
System Setup function or press STEP to return to the SYSTEM LANGUAGE message.
To enable the System Security Code:
1. Follow the Security Code Enable/Disable procedure in the previous section to make the required DIP switch
enable settings,

5-17

5 System Setup

Maintenance History

2. Press CHANGE in response to the first SYSTEM SECURITY CODE message. Enter any six digits for your
code and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
CODE: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONT

Maintenance History
The Maintenance Report feature is available in the TLS-350 with version 27 software and a NVMEM 203 card
installed.
Press STEP to display the message:
MAINTENANCE HISTORY
DISABLED

This feature maintains a rolling 3 year history of the following maintenance records:

• Active Alarm (alarm post) – alarm type and number, device number, active date/time. This includes protected
maintenance alarms.

• Inactive Alarm (alarm clear) – alarm type and number, device number, inactive date/time. This includes protected
maintenance alarms.

• Maintenance History enable - date/time of enable
• Maintenance History disable –date/time of disable
• Service codes – service code, date/time entered (Note: Service codes can be found in the Maintenance
Service Code Quick Help (P/N 577013-874)

• Last Monthly Fullest Periodic Tank Test Passed – tank number, start date/time
• Last Monthly PLLD 0.2 GPH Test Passed – tank number, date/time entered (record added at 1st of month)
• Last Monthly WLLD 0.2 GPH Test Passed – tank number, date/time entered (record added at 1st of month)
• Last Monthly VLLD 0.2 GPH Test Passed – tank number, date/time entered (record added at 1st of month)
The default for this feature is DISABLED. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to change the default to ENABLED.

Tank Chart Security
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TANK CHART SECURITY
PRESS 

5-18

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Press ENTER to continue:
TANK CHART SECURITY
CODE :
000000

TANK CHART SECURITY
ENTER PASSCODE->______<

This display appears if a passcode has not been entered (default). All zeros
disables Tank Chart Security.
This display appears if Tank Chart Security is enabled - a passcode other than all zeros
has been entered. Enter the 6-digit numeric passcode and press ENTER.

If you have not entered a passcode, press CHANGE and enter a 6-digit numeric passcode, then press ENTER to
accept your entry:
CODE: ******
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.
CONSOLE SERIAL NUMBER:
S/N : (serial number)

If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the TLS Console serial number from the label on the bottom of the
console. Press ENTER to accept your entry. Press STEP to continue:
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES:
W&M: (weights and measures)

If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the Weights and Measures office number. Press ENTER to accept your
entry. Press STEP to continue.

Custom Alarm Labels
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
CUSTOM ALARM LABELS
PRESS 

This step allows you to enter up to 16 custom labels and indications per alarm (one per device with a maximum of
16 devices), for up to 10 alarms, for a maximum of 160 labels, each up to 19 characters in length, and each with
its own indication set. Only alarms that applicable to your site’s equipment configuration and features can be
customized.
Your custom labels replace the system generated display/print alarm labels that are used in display messages,
printouts, and RS-232 reports only. Alarm labels used in Autodial, Output Relay, WPLLD, PLLD, and VLLD line
disable setups, shown in the Autodial Alarm Label column of Table 5-1, will not change.
After you have made a custom label change, you also select a custom indicator set for that alarm which determines
what console indicator(s) are activated when the alarm is posted:

• LCD: Display in the front panel screen - yes / no
• Print: yes / no
• Beep: Turn on the console beeper - yes / no

5-19

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

• LED: Turn on the front panel Warning or write in your new label in the Custom Alarm Label column of Table 5-1.
When you have completed your custom alarm label entries, press the PRINT key while in System Setup, to print
out a copy of your changes.
To continue, press ENTER:
CUSTOM ALARM LABELS
DISABLED

Press CHANGE:
CUSTOM ALARM LABELS
ENABLED

Press ENTER:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue:
CUSTOM ALARM LABELS
SYSTEM ALARMS : NO

Press CHANGE and ENTER to access available System Alarms, or STEP to move through the alarm sets: In-Tank
alarms, Liquid Sensor alarms, etc. When making changes, standard setup entry procedures apply - you can
designate a single device or all devices for the label change. After each custom label entry, you then select enable
or disable for each of the four console alarm indicators assigned to that custom alarm: LCD, Print, Beep, and LED.

5-20

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Note: The ID Code column of Table 5-1 contains codes that enable service technicians to recognize your custom labels.
Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
System Alarm

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

ID Code
Type/Num

PAPER OUT

01/01

PRINTER ERROR

01/02

WRONG SOFTWARE WARNING

01/03

BATTERY IS OFF

01/04

TOO MANY TANKS

01/05

SYS SECURITY WARNING

01/06

ROM REVISION WARNING

01/07

REMOTE DISPLAY ERROR

01/08

SOFTWARE MODULE WARN

01/10

TANK TEST SHUTDOWN

01/11

CLOSE SHIFT PENDING

01/13

CLOSE DAILY PENDING

01/14

PC (H8) REVISION WARN

01/15

SYSTEM SELF TEST ALM

01/16

CLOCK IS INCORRECT

01/17

5-21

Autodial Alarm Label
N/A

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
Tank Alarm

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

ID Code
Type/Num

Autodial Alarm Label

SETUP DATA WARNING

02/01

N/A

LEAK ALARM

02/02

LEAK

HIGH WATER ALARM

02/03

HIGH WATER

OVERFILL ALARM

02/04

OVERFILL

LOW PRODUCT ALARM

02/05

LOW PRODUCT

SUDDEN LOSS ALARM

02/06

SUDDEN LOSS

HIGH PRODUCT ALARM

02/07

HI PRODUCT

INVALID FUEL LEVEL

02/08

INVALID HGT

PROBE OUT

02/09

PROBE OUT

HIGH WATER WARNING

02/10

WATER WARN

DELIVERY NEEDED

02/11

DLVY NEEDED

MAX PRODUCT ALARM

02/12

MAX PRODUCT

GROSS TEST FAIL

02/13

GROSS FAIL

PERIODIC TEST FAIL

02/14

PERIOD FAIL

ANNUAL TEST FAIL

02/15

ANNUAL FAIL

PER TST NEEDED WRN

02/16

PER NEED WRN

ANN TST NEEDED WRN

02/17

ANN NEED WRN

PER TST NEEDED ALM

02/18

PER NEED AL

ANN TST NEEDED ALM

02/19

ANN NEED AL

TANK TEST ACTIVE

02/20

TEST NOTIFY

NO CSLD IDLE TIME

02/21

No IDLE TIME

TANK SIPHON BREAK

02/22

SIPHON BRK

CSLD INCR RATE WARN

02/23

CSLD INCR

ACCUCHART CAL WARN

02/24

ACCU WARN

RECON WARN

02/25

RECON WARN

RECON ALARM

02/26

RECON ALARM

LOW TEMP WARNING

02/27

LOW TEMP

MISSING TICKET WARN

02/28

TICKET WARN

GROSS FAIL LINE TNK

02/29

GROSS LN TK

DELIVY DENSITY WARN

02/30

DLVY DEN WRN

FUEL QUALITY ALARM

02/32

FUEL QUAL

5-22

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
Liquid Sensor
(03), Vapor Sensor (04), Groundwater Sensor
(07), Type A Sensor (08), Type B
Sensor (12), or
Universal Sensor
(13) Alarm

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

SETUP DATA WARNING

ID Code
Type/Num
(for type,
see alarm
category)/
02

VLLD Alarm

N/A

FUEL ALARM

ditto/03

FUEL

SENSOR OUT ALARM

ditto/04

OPEN

SHORT ALARM

ditto/05

SHORT

WATER ALARM

ditto/06

WATER

WATER OUT ALARM

ditto/07

WATER OUT

HIGH LIQUID ALARM

ditto/08

HIGH LIQUID

LOW LIQUID ALARM

ditto/09

LOW LIQUID

LIQUID WARNING

ditto/10

LIQ WARNING

SENSOR NORMAL
Input Alarm

Autodial Alarm Label

N/A

SETUP DATA WARNING

05/01

N/A

EXTERN INPUT NORMAL

05/02

N/A

EXTERN INPUT ALARM

05/03

CLOSED

SETUP DATA WARNING

06/01

N/A

LLD SELF TEST FAIL

06/02

N/A

LINE LEAK SHUTDOWN

06/03

SHUTDOWN

LINE LEAK TEST FAIL

06/04

N/A

SELF TEST INVALID

06/05

SELF WARN

CONT HANDLE WARN

06/06

HANDLE WARN

GRS-LINE TEST FAIL

06/07

GROSS LINE

GRS-LINE SELF FAIL

06/08

GROSS LSELF

GRS-PUMP TEST FAIL

06/09

GROSS PUMP

GRS-PUMP SELF FAIL

06/10

GROSS PSELF

PER TST NEEDED WRN

06/11

PER NEED WN

ANN TST NEEDED WRN

06/12

ANN NEED WN

PER TST NEEDED ALM

06/13

PER NEED AL

ANN TST NEEDED ALM

06/14

ANN NEED AL

PER-LINE TEST FAIL

06/15

PER LINE

PER-LINE SELF FAIL

06/16

PER LSELF

5-23

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
VLLD Alarm

Receiver Alarm

Power Side DIM
(MDIM) (18) or
Communication
Side DIM (EDIM/
BDIM) (19)

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

ID Code
Type/Num

Autodial Alarm Label

PER-PUMP TEST FAIL

06/17

PER PUMP

PER-PUMP SELF FAIL

06/18

PER PSELF

ANN-LINE TEST FAIL

06/19

ANN LINE

ANN-LINE SELF FAIL

06/20

ANN LSELF

ANN-PUMP TEST FAIL

06/21

ANN PUMP

ANN-PUMP SELF FAIL

06/22

ANNLSELF

LLD PRESSURE WARN

06/23

PRESS WARN

LLD PRESSURE ALARM

06/24

PRESS ALM

LLD TEST FAULT-GRS

06/25

TST FLT GRS

LLD TEST FAULT-PER

06/26

TST FLT PER

LLD TEST FAULT-ANN

06/27

TST FLT ANN

FUEL OUT

06/28

FUEL OUT

SETUP DATA WARNING

14/01

N/A

AUTODIAL FAILURE

14/02

N/A

SERVICE REPORT WARN

14/03

SERVICE REPORT WARN

ALARM CLEAR WARNING

14/04

ALARM CLEAR WARNING

DELIVERY REPORT WRN

14/05

DELIVERY REPORT WRN

DISABLED DIM ALARM

(for type,
see alarm
category)/
02

COMMUNICATION ALARM

DISABLED

ditto/03

COMM ERROR

BDIM only

TRANSACTION ALARM

19/04

TRANS ALARM

Product (BIR)
Alarm

RECON SETUP WARNING

20/01

N/A

PROD THRESHOLD ALM

20/02

REC THRHOLD

CLOSE SHIFT WARNING

20/03

CLOSE SHIFT

CLOSE DAILY WARNING

20/04

CLOSE DAILY

SETUP DATA WARNING

21/01

N/A

GROSS LINE FAIL

21/02

GROSS FAIL

ANNUAL LINE FAIL

21/03

ANN LN FAIL

PER TST NEEDED WRN

21/04

PER NEED WRN

PER TST NEEDED ALM

21/05

PER NEED AL

PLLD Alarm

5-24

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
PLLD Alarm

WPLLD Alarm

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

ID Code
Type/Num

Autodial Alarm Label

PLLD OPEN ALARM

21/06

OPEN ALARM

PLLD SHUTDOWN ALARM

21/08

SHUTDOWN

PERIOD LINE FAIL

21/11

PERIOD FAIL

ANN TST NEEDED WRN

21/12

ANN NEED WN

ANN TST NEEDED ALM

21/13

ANN NEED AL

LOW PRESSURE ALARM

21/14

LO PRES ALM

CONT HANDLE ALRM

21/16

HANDLE ALRM

FUEL OUT

21/17

FUEL OUT

LN EQUIP FAULT ALM

21/18

LN EQ FAULT

SETUP DATA WARNING

26/01

N/A

GROSS LINE FAIL

26/02

GROSS FAIL

PERIOD LINE FAIL

26/03

PERIOD FAIL

PER TST NEEDED WRN

26/04

PER NEED WN

PER TST NEEDED ALM

26/05

PER NEED AL

WPLLD OPEN WARN

26/06

OPEN ALARM

WPLLD COMM ALARM

26/07

COMM ALARM

WPLLD SHUTDOWN ALARM

26/08

SHUTDOWN

ANNUAL LINE FAIL

26/10

ANN LN FAIL

ANN TST NEEDED WRN

26/11

ANN NEED WN

ANN TST NEEDED ALM

26/12

ANN NEED AL

CONT HANDLE ALRM

26/16

HANDLE ALRM

FUEL OUT

26/17

FUEL OUT

LN EQUIP FAULT ALM

26/18

LN EQ FAULT

5-25

5 System Setup

Custom Alarm Labels

Table 5-1.- Alarm Labels

Alarm Category
Smart Sensor
Alarm

Pump Relay Monitor Alarm

VMCI Interface
Dispenser Alarms

VMC Alarms

Display/print Alarm Label

Custom Alarm Label

ID Code
Type/Num

Autodial Alarm Label

SETUP DATA WARNING

28/01

SETUP WARN

COMMUNICATION ALARM

28/01

COMM ALARM

SENSOR FAULT ALARM

28/03

SENSR FAULT

FUEL WARNING

28/04

FUEL WARN

FUEL ALARM

28/05

FUEL ALARM

WATER WARNING

28/06

WATER WARN

WATER ALARM

28/07

WATER ALARM

HIGH LIQUID WARNING

28/08

HI LIQ WRN

HIGH LIQUID ALARM

28/09

HI LIQ ALM

LOW LIQUID WARNING

28/10

LOW LIQ WRN

LOW LIQUID ALARM

28/11

LOW LIQ ALM

TEMPERATURE WARNING

28/12

TEMP WARN

RELAY ACTIVE

28/13

RELAY ACTIV

INSTALL ALARM

28/14

INSTALL ALM

SENSOR FAULT WARN

28/15

SNSR FLT WN

VACUUM WARNING

28/16

VACUUM WARN

NO VACUUM ALARM

28/17

NO VAC ALM

SETUP DATA WARNING

34/01

SETUP WARN

PUMP RELAY MON ALM

34/02

PUMP ALARM

SETUP DATA WARNING

35/01

SETUP WARN

COMMUNICATION ALARM

35/02

COMM ALARM

VMC COM TIMEOUT ALARM

36/01

COM TIMEOUT

METER NOT CONNECTED

36/02

METR NC ALM

FP SHUTDOWN WARNING

36/03

SHUTDWN WRN

FP SHUTDOWN ALARM

36/04

SHUTDWN ALM

5-26

5 System Setup

Service Notice (TLS-350 Consoles Only)

Service Notice (TLS-350 Consoles Only)
When service is preformed at a site, “false” alarms and “false” deliveries can be generated. “False” alarms can
trigger unneeded service dispatches to the site and “false” deliveries can cause reconciliation problems.
When a ‘Service Notice’ session is enabled the following will happen:
1. A Service Notice warning is posted:
a. Front panel display will show the warning
b. Front panel yellow LED will blink
c. Console beeper is silent
d. The warning will printout
e. The warning will appear in the active alarm report
f. The warning will post in both the priority and non-priority alarm histories
2. A ‘Service Notice’ duration timer starts (1 to 8 hours as selected in Diagnostic Mode, default 2 hours).
3. A ‘Service Notice’session start record is entered in the Service Notice history (contains the last 10 records).
4. If ‘Delivery Override’ is enabled then any deliveries that occur when the TLS is in a ‘Service Notice’ session will
not go into the standard delivery history or BIR delivery history.
5. If ‘Delivery Override’ is disabled then any deliveries that occur when the TLS is in a ‘Service Notice’ session will
go into the standard delivery history or BIR delivery history.
6. All tank alarms will work as normal
7. All alarms will work as normal
When a ‘Service Notice’ feature is disabled in Diagnostic Mode, OR the ‘Service Notice’ session is
ended, OR the ‘Service Notice’ session times out, the following will happen:
1. The ‘Service Notice’ warning clears
2. Front panel yellow LED turns off
3. The ‘Service Notice’ warning will clear in both the priority and non-priority alarm histories
4. The ‘Service Notice’ wiring is removed from the active alarm report
5. The ‘Service Notice’ end record is entered in the Service Notice history
6. The ‘Service Notice’ duration timer clears
7. Any deliveries that occur will be recorded in the standard delivery and BIR delivery histories as normal.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SERVICE NOTICE
PRESS 

Press ENTER:
SERVICE NOTICE
DISABLE

5-27

5 System Setup

System Beeper

Press CHANGE:
SERVICE NOTICE
ENABLED

Press ENTER:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
DELIVERY OVERRIDE
DISABLED

Menu will only appear if Service Notice is enabled and there is
a probe module

If Delivery Override is desired, press CHANGE, otherwise, press STEP.
DELIVERY OVERRIDE
ENABLED

Press ENTER:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
SERVICE NOTICE
ENABLE

If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ISO 3166 COUNTRY
PRESS 

This feature is an international option.

Press ENTER, CHANGE and then enter the three alpha-character country code. Default is blank.

System Beeper
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
BEEPER
ENABLED

If you want to disable the console beeper, press CHANGE:
BEEPER
DISABLED

5-28

5 System Setup

Mass/Density

Press ENTER:
DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
DISABLED
ARE YOU SURE? : NO

Press CHANGE:
DISABLED
ARE YOU SURE? : YES

Press ENTER:
ARE YOU SURE? : YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Mass/Density
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
MASS/DENSITY
PRESS 

When mass is required in addition to volume as an alternative measure of fuel, this feature must be enabled. Press
ENTER:
MASS/DENSITY
DISABLED

Press CHANGE to enable this feature:
MASS/DENSITY
ENABLED

Press ENTER to accept:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

NOTE: A Setup Data Warning is posted from the time the Mass/Density feature is enabled until a product density
value is entered for that tank, clearing the alarm (ref.“Tank Density” on page 7-4).

5-29

5 System Setup

Fiscal Height Security

Press STEP:
MASS/DENSITY
PRESS 

NOTE: When Fiscal Height Security is enabled and DIP switch position 4 is in the ON position, then the Fiscal
Height Security parameter AND the following tank height modifying parameters Probe Offset, Tank Tilt and Float
Size cannot be modified!
Press ENTER:
FISCAL HEIGHT SECURITY
DISABLED

Press CHANGE to enable this feature:
FISCAL HEIGHT SECURITY
ENABLED

Press ENTER to accept:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

NOTE: If the TLS-350 is physically sealed then the Fiscal Height Security menu is displayed but cannot be
changed.

5-30

6

Communications Setup

The Communications Setup function allows you to: enter communication port settings for each Comm Module;
enter dates/times for each of the Comm Modules to automatically dial out and connect to a selected remote
device; and select the alarm notifications and status reports (modem modules only) for transmission to the remote
device once the connection has been made.

Selecting the Communications Setup Function
To select Communications Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Port Settings
In response to the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP message, press STEP until you see the message:
PORT SETTINGS
PRESS 

This display allows you to access the communications settings—Baud Rate, Parity, Stop Bit, etc.—for any board
installed in the console’s Comm Bay.

NOTE: PORT SETTINGS - INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATIONS WITH SITELINK MODEMS
SiteLink modems are auto detected by system software. This auto-detect feature will set, automatically, the Baud
Rate, Parity, Data Length, and Stop bit values required for the detected modem type (see Table 6-1). If necessary
you can manually enter another value for any of these default port settings.
Table 6-1.- SiteLink Modem Default Port Settings
Modem

Baud Rate

Parity

Data Length

Stop Bit

Netcomm Smart M7F (Australia)

2400

Odd

7

1

9600

None

8

1

US Robotics (UK)
VR TLS Analog Mod (UK)
VR TLS GSM Modem (UK)

BAUD RATE
Press ENTER in response to the PORT SETTINGS message. The system displays the message:
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
BAUD RATE: 1200

6-1

6 Communications Setup

Port Settings

The system labels the communications module in the leftmost slot as “COMM BOARD: 1”. To access port settings
for the remaining communications modules, press TANK/SENSOR.
Choose the baud rate that matches the external device connected to the module. For the RS-232 and Dual-Port
RS-232/RS-485 Modules, the choices are; 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600. For modem modules, scroll
through the choices and select the one that matches the external device.
To accept the rate shown on the display, press STEP. (The PARITY message appears.) To choose another Baud
Rate, press CHANGE until you see the correct baud rate. Then press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system
displays the message:
BAUD RATE: XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

PARITY
Choose the parity that matches the external device connected to the module. The choices are NONE, ODD, and
EVEN.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
PARITY: ODD

To accept the parity shown on the message, press STEP. To choose another parity setting, press CHANGE until
you see the correct parity. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays the message:
PARITY: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

STOP BIT
Choose the stop bit (1 or 2) that matches the external device connected to the module.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
STOP BIT: 1 STOP

To accept 1, press STEP. To choose 2, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with
the message:
STOP BIT: X STOP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

DATA LENGTH
Choose the data length that matches the external device connected to the module.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
DATA LENGTH: 7 DATA

6-2

6 Communications Setup

Port Settings

The choices are 7 or 8. To accept 7, press STEP. To choose 8, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system
confirms your choice with the message:
DATA LENGTH: X DATA
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

DIAL TYPE
Choose the Dial Type (Tone or Pulse) that matches the receiving device.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
DIAL TYPE: TONE

NOTE: The above message appears only for systems equipped with a modem module.
To accept Tone, press STEP. To choose Pulse, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the
message:
DIAL TYPE: PULSE
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

ANSWER ON
Use this display to set the number of rings on which the system answers an incoming communication. You may
enter 0 through 9 rings.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
ANSWER ON: 1

NOTE: The above message appears only for systems equipped with a modem module.
To accept the system default of 1 ring, press STEP. To choose another value you can toggle the CHANGE key (for
2 through 8 rings) or enter the desired value using the numeric keys. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The
system displays:
ANSWER ON: (Number)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

SECURITY CODE
If desired, you can enter a 6-digit security code for this board. To accept no code press STEP to continue. To enter
a code press CHANGE.
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
CODE: DISABLED

Enter the 6-digit code (e.g., 000016) and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
CODE: 000016

6-3

6 Communications Setup

Port Settings

Press STEP to continue.

SETTING THE MODEM TYPE (INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATIONS)
This feature lets you select the modem used with a SiteLink Module.
COMM BOARD: 1 (S-Link)
MODEM: NETCOMM SMART M7F

Press ENTER to accept the modem option or press CHANGE and then ENTER to choose US ROBOTICS (UK),
VR TLS ANALOG MOD, or VR TLS GSM MODEM. Press STEP to continue.

MODEM SETUP STRING
If you have a modem installed, the system displays the message:
MODEM SETUP STRING
c 1:

This string will contain modem commands. The default for the string will be a blank string (no additional
commands). Press CHANGE and enter up to 20 characters, e.g., AT&B1.
Note: the’&’, ‘=’, and ‘%’ characters are available only when entering the Modem Setup String in all languages
except Japanese, Russian, Turkish, and Greek. See Table 2-1 on page 2-4 for instructions on entering these
characters.
Press ENTER to select string and confirm selection, e.g.:
MODEM SETUP STRING
c 1: AT&B1

Press STEP to continue.

DIAL TONE INTERVAL
If you have a modem installed, the system displays the message:
COMM BOARD: 1 (Type)
DIAL TONE INTERVAL: 32

This feature allows the user to program the console to check the phone lines every selected number of hours. If
after three sequential checks in which the line is not operative, a NO DIAL TONE is posted. The default interval is
32 hours and can be set from 1 to 9999. Press CHANGE and enter the desired interval, e.g., 48. Press ENTER to
select your entry and the system displays the message:
COMM BOARD: 1 (FXMOD)
DIAL TONE INTERVAL: 48

Press STEP to continue.

DTR NORMAL STATE
If you have a S-Sat Module installed, the system displays the message:
COMM BOARD: 1 (S-SAT)
DTR NORMAL STATE: HIGH

6-4

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Transmit Setup (RS-232 or RS-232/RS-485 Modules Only)

This feature allows the user to program the S-Sat Module’s Data Transmit Ready (DTR) normal state to either High
or Low. The default state is High. Press CHANGE and ENTER to select the Low state, or press STEP to accept
the default state and continue.

SPECIFYING PORT SETTINGS FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION MODULES
After you set the last port setting, the system returns to the PORT SETTINGS message. If you have additional
communication modules to set up, press ENTER to display the BAUD RATE message, press TANK/SENSOR to
choose another communication module and then repeat the procedure described above to enter port settings for
the selected module.

CONTINUE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
When you have specified port settings for all the communication modules, press STEP in response to the PORT
SETTINGS message to advance to the next communications setup function.

Auto-Transmit Setup (RS-232 or RS-232/RS-485 Modules Only)
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTO TRANSMIT SETUP
PRESS 

The Auto-Transmit Setup feature allows you to set an Automatic Transmit or Transmit/Repeat of any of the
following signals – in-tank alarm, sensor alarm, delivery start/stop, and input on/off – to an external device via the
RS-232 or RS-485 port.
If you enable this feature, the system provides three choices for each type of alarm, delivery, or input feature
configured in the system. These choices are: Disable, Transmit, Transmit/Repeat. If you choose Transmit or
Transmit/Repeat for any alarm, delivery, or input message, you must enter an Auto-Transmit Delay Time. In addition,
if you choose Transmit/Repeat for any item, you must enter an Auto-Transmit Repeat Time.
NOTE: The entered Delay and Repeat times apply to all transmit and repeat choices.

AUTO-TRANSMIT METHOD
Press ENTER in response to the AUTO TRANSMIT SETUP message. The system displays the message:
TRANSMIT MESSAGE SETUP
PRESS 

Press ENTER to continue. The system displays:
AUTO LEAK ALARM LIMIT
DISABLED

Use this display to choose Auto Transmit for the Auto Leak Alarm Limit. To choose DISABLED, press STEP. To
choose Transmit, press CHANGE once in response to the AUTO LEAK ALARM LIMIT message. To choose
TRANSMIT/REPEAT, press CHANGE twice. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
(Selected Setting)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Repeat the above steps to continue selecting Auto Transmit for the remaining alarm, delivery, or input signals:

6-5

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Transmit Setup (RS-232 or RS-232/RS-485 Modules Only)

• AUTO HIGH WATER LIMIT

• AUTO OVERFILL LIMIT

• AUTO LOW PRODUCT

• AUTO THEFT LIMIT

• AUTO DELIVERY START

• AUTO DELIVERY END

• AUTO EXTERNAL INPUT ON

• AUTO EXTERNAL INPUT OFF

• AUTO SENSOR FUEL ALARM

• AUTO SENSOR WATER ALARM

• AUTO SENSOR OUT ALARM
When you have finished selecting Auto Transmit for the above items, press STEP until you see TRANSMIT
MESSAGE SETUP message.

AUTO DELAY TIME
Press STEP in response to the TRANSMIT MESSAGE SETUP message. The system displays the message:
AUTO TRANSMIT MESSAGE
AUTO DELAY TIME: 005

NOTE: The above message appears only if you chose Transmit for at least one of the items in the step described
above.
Use this display to specify the time interval between any alarm, delivery, or input indication in the system and the
time the system sends an Auto-Transmit message. To set the Auto Delay Time, press CHANGE and enter the
delay time, in seconds, up to a maximum of 254 seconds. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system
displays:
AUTO DELAY TIME: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

AUTO REPEAT TIME
After you set the Auto Delay Time, the system displays the message:
AUTO TRANSMIT MESSAGE
AUTO REPEAT TIME: 060

NOTE: The above message appears only if you chose Transmit/Repeat for at least one of the items in the steps
described above.
Use this display to specify the length of time the system waits before retransmitting a message. To set the Auto
Repeat Time, press CHANGE and enter the repeat time, in seconds, up to a maximum of 240 seconds. Press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
AUTO REPEAT TIME: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

CONTINUE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
Press STEP to return to the AUTO TRANSMIT SETUP message. Press STEP again to continue to the next
communications setup function.

6-6

6 Communications Setup

Phone Directory Setup

Phone Directory Setup
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PHONE DIRECTORY SETUP
PRESS 

NOTE: This message appears only for systems equipped with a modem module.
Through the Phone Directory feature, you can program up to 8 telephone numbers for automatic dialing to
teletype, facsimile, or computer modems. The system sends specific reports to the programmed telephone
numbers.

RECEIVER CONFIGURATION
Press ENTER in response to the PHONE DIRECTORY SETUP message. The system displays the message:
RCVR CONFIG
X X X X XX X X X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system how many phone numbers are to be entered. Press CHANGE twice to configure
one receiver. To configure additional receivers, press the Right-Arrow key, then press CHANGE for up to seven
more receivers.Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:

XXXXXXXXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE
Press STEP to continue.

RECEIVER LOCATION
After you set the receiver configuration, the system displays the message:
ENTER RCVR LOCATION
D1:

Enter the location (e.g., MAIN OFFICE FAX) of the selected receiver. To enter the location, press CHANGE. Enter
up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the location and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry:
D1: (Destination)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

RECEIVER TELEPHONE NUMBER
After you enter the receiver location, the system displays the message:
ENTER RCVR PHONE NO.
D1:

You can enter up to 20 numbers for each telephone number. Be sure to include the direct-dial long distance code
and any numbers required to access outside lines. Use a comma (,) if the telephone system requires a pause
during dialing. When entering receiver telephone numbers, the keypad defaults to numeric mode (e.g., you only
press the keys once to enter a digit instead of the 3 or 4 times required in alphanumeric mode). To enter the phone

6-7

6 Communications Setup

Phone Directory Setup

number for the selected receiver, press CHANGE. Enter the number and press ENTER to confirm your entry. The
system displays:
D1: (Phone #)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

SELECT MODEM
After you set the receiver phone number, the system displays the message:
D1:
SELECT MODEM: 3

Your system may have up to three a modem modules in slots 1, 2, and/or 3 of the Comm Bay. Enter the slot
number in which the a modem module that you are using as the modem for the specified telephone number is
installed. To accept the slot number shown, press STEP, or press CHANGE until the correct slot number appears,
then ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
SELECT MODEM: [Selection]
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

RECEIVER TYPE
After you select the modem module’s Comm Bay slot number, the system displays the message:
D1:
RCVR TYPE: TELETYPE

The system provides three choices for the type of receiver: Teletype, Facsimile, or Computer. A description of each
follows:
Teletype: the system calls the receiver telephone number and then transmits the programmed RS-232 reports.
Facsimile: the system calls the receiver telephone number then transmits the report in facsimile format.
Computer: the system calls the receiver telephone number and then waits 1-minute for a command from the
computer (receiver).
To choose Teletype, press STEP. (The system displays the Retry Number message.) To choose Facsimile, press
CHANGE once. To choose Computer, press CHANGE twice. Press ENTER to confirm your choice:
RCVR TYPE: (Selected Setting)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

RETRY NUMBER
After you select the receiver type, the system displays the message:
D1:
RETRY NUMBER: XX

6-8

6 Communications Setup

Phone Directory Setup

You can specify the number of times the system attempts to redial a telephone number if there is a busy signal, no
answer, or incomplete connection. To enter the number, press CHANGE and enter a number between 3 and 99.
Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
DIAL RETRY NUMBER: XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

RETRY DELAY TIME
After you set the retry dial number, the system displays the message:
D1:
DIAL RETRY DELAY: 00

You can specify the time interval the system waits to redial a telephone number if there is a busy signal, no answer,
or incomplete connection. To enter the interval, press CHANGE and enter the number of minutes between 1 and
60. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
DIAL RETRY DELAY: XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

CONFIRMATION REPORT
After you set the dial retry delay, the system displays the message:
D1:
CONFIRMATION REPORT: OFF

This message selects whether or not the system confirms when specified reports have been transmitted
successfully. The default condition is Off. If you do not wish to receive confirmations, press STEP. (The system
returns to the PHONE DIRECTORY SETUP message.) To enable the feature, press CHANGE and press ENTER.
The system confirms your choice with the message:
CONFIRMATION REPORT: ON
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

SETTING UP ADDITIONAL PHONE NUMBERS
After you specify the confirmation report option and press STEP, the system returns to the PHONE DIRECTORY
SETUP message. If you have additional receivers to set up, press ENTER until the system displays the RCVR
CONFIG message. Press STEP, then press TANK/SENSOR to choose another receiver. Enter the setup data for
this receiver by repeating the procedures described above, beginning with the section entitled “Receiver Location”
on page 6-7.

CONTINUE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
When you have set up all the phone numbers/receivers, press STEP in response to the PHONE DIRECTORY
SETUP message. (The system displays the AUTO DIAL SETUP message.)

6-9

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Setup

Auto-Dial Setup
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTO DIAL SETUP
PRESS 

NOTE: This message appears only if you have a modem module installed and after you complete the Phone
Directory Setup.
Using Auto-Dial Setup, you can tell the system what reports to transmit, to whom to transmit, and when to transmit.
You can also specify the intervals at which the system transmits this information.

RECEIVER REPORT LIST
Press ENTER in response to the AUTO DIAL SETUP message. The system displays the message:
D1: RCVR REPORT LIST
PRESS 

Use this display to choose the types of status reports that you want to transmit to all programmed telephone
numbers or to single telephone numbers. Press ENTER to display the message:
D1: RECEIVER NAME
SYSTEM STATUS: NO

To exclude System Status reports from transmission to the receiver specified in the first line of the message (D1,
D2, etc.), press STEP. (The system displays the next type of report.) To include System Status reports for
transmission to the selected receiver, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system confirms you choice with the
message:
SYSTEM STATUS: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Repeat the steps described in the previous paragraph for each type of report. The list of reports may include:

• SYSTEM STATUS

• PERIODIC BOOK VAR

• NONPRIORITY HISTORY

• IN-TANK STATUS

• INVENTORY

• DELIVERY

• LEAK DETECT

• SHIFT INVENTORY

• PRESSURE LLD RESULT

• DAILY VAR ANALY

• PERIODIC DLVY VAR

• PERIODIC ROW REPORT

• FUEL MANAGEMENT

• CSLD REPORT

• LAST DELIVERY

• LINE LEAK STATUS*

• PRIORITY HISTORY*

• WPLLD LLD RESULT

* Volumetric Line Leak Detection

When you have specified the reports you want to transmit, press STEP to return to the RCVR REPORT LIST
message. If you want to transmit reports to additional receivers, press ENTER to redisplay the message:
D1: RECEIVER NAME
SYSTEM STATUS: NO

6-10

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Setup

Press TANK/SENSOR to select a second receiver and repeat the steps described above to select the types of
reports to be transmitted to that receiver. Press TANK/SENSOR to select a third receiver, and so forth. When you
have selected reports to transmit to all the receivers that you want, press STEP in response to the RCVR
REPORT LIST message.

AUTO DIAL METHOD: ALL PHONES/SINGLE PHONE
When you press STEP in response to the RCVR REPORT LIST message, the system displays the message:
AUTO DIAL METHOD
ALL PHONES

You can send the selected reports at the same time (frequency) for all phone numbers (receivers) or different times
for each phone number. To choose All Phones, press STEP. The system displays the ON DATE message for All
Receivers:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

To transmit reports using different frequencies, press CHANGE in response to the AUTO DIAL METHOD
message and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
SINGLE PHONE
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
SINGLE RCVR: D1
ON DATE

NOTES: If you choose Single Phone, you must enter report transmission frequency information for each receiver
individually. The screen examples shown in this procedure assume that you have selected All Phones. If you
choose Single Phone, the phrase “ALL RCVR” is replaced on each screen by the selected receiver number (RCVR
1, RCVR 2, etc.).

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: SPECIFIC DATE
When you press STEP in response to the AUTO DIAL METHOD message, the system displays the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

Use this display to select the Auto-Dial Frequency. You may choose among the following frequency options:

• ON DATE: Lets you enter a specific date and time to transmit the reports.
• ANNUALLY: Lets you select the month, week (1, 2, 3, or 4), and day you wish to transmit reports.
• MONTHLY: Lets you select the week (1, 2, 3, or 4) and day you wish to transmit reports.
• WEEKLY: Lets you select the day you wish to transmit weekly reports.
• DAILY: Lets you select the time of day you wish to transmit daily reports.
• BIR END: Lets you select having reports transmit at the actual closing time of the period. For rolling, this would
be the end of the rolling period; for monthly this would be the first of the month.

6-11

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Setup

To set the Auto-Dial Frequency to On Date, press STEP. (To set the frequency to Annually, Monthly, Weekly, Daily,
or BIR End follow the procedures described in the corresponding section below.) The system displays the
message:
DIAL ON DATE: ALL RCVRS
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX

Press CHANGE, and enter the date on which you want the reports to be transmitted. Enter the date in the format
MM/DD/YYYY. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to enter the time you want the reports to transmit. The system displays the message:
DIAL TIME: ALL RCVRS
TIME: XX:XX AM PM

Press CHANGE, and enter the time. Press the Right Arrow key to choose AM or PM. Press ENTER to confirm
your entry:
TIME: XX:XX AM PM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone,
refer to the section entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone
method and have additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled “Setting Up the Frequency for
Additional Receivers (Single Phone Only)” on page 6-15.

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: ANNUALLY
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

To transmit the reports annually, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ANNUALLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue setting the annual transmission. The system displays the message:
ANNUALLY: ALL RCVRS
JAN WEEK1 MON

To set the date of the annual transmission, press CHANGE until the month during which you want to transmit the
reports appears. Press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the week during which you want to transmit the
reports appears, and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to transmit the
reports appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
MONTH WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

6-12

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Setup

For example, if you chose to transmit the reports on the Friday of the first week of June, the system would display
the message:
JUNE WEEK 1 FRI
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone,
refer to the section entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone
method and have additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled“Setting Up the Frequency for
Additional Receivers (Single Phone Only)” on page 6-15.

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: MONTHLY
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

Press CHANGE twice and press ENTER. The system displays the following message:
MONTHLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
MONTHLY: ALL RCVRS
WEEK1 MON

To set the date of the monthly transmission, press CHANGE until the week during which you want to transmit the
reports appears and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to transmit the
reports appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone,
refer to the section entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone
method and have additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled “Setting Up the Frequency for
Additional Receivers (Single Phone Only)” on page 6-15.

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: WEEKLY
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

Press CHANGE three times and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
WEEKLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
WEEKLY: ALL RCVRS
MON

6-13

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Setup

To set the date of the weekly transmission, press CHANGE until the day on which you want to transmit the reports
appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone,
refer to the section entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone
method and have additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled “Setting Up the Frequency for
Additional Receivers (Single Phone Only)” on page 6-15.

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: DAILY
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

Press CHANGE four times and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
DAILY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
DAILY: ALL RCVRS
TIME: DISABLED

Press CHANGE and enter the time at which you want to transmit the reports. Press the Right Arrow key to choose
AM or PM. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
TIME: (Time)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone,
refer to the section entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone
method and have additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled “Setting Up the Frequency for
Additional Receivers (Single Phone Only)” below.

AUTO-DIAL FREQUENCY: BIR END
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ALL RCVRS
ON DATE

Press CHANGE five times and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
BIR END
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the message:
DIAL BIR END: ALL RCVRS
TIME DISABLED

6-14

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup

To enable this feature, press CHANGE:
DIAL BIR END: ALL RCVRS
TIME: AUTO DAILY CLOSING

Press ENTER and the system confirms your choice with the message:
TIME: AUTO DAILY CLOSING
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.
If you are using the All Phones method or have set up all the receivers for Single Phone, refer to the section
entitled “Continue Communications Setup” on page 6-15. If you are using the Single Phone method and have
additional receivers to set up, refer to the section entitled “Setting Up the Frequency for Additional Receivers
(Single Phone Only)” on page 6-15.

SETTING UP THE FREQUENCY FOR ADDITIONAL RECEIVERS
(SINGLE PHONE ONLY)
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: RCVR REPORT LIST
PRESS 

Press STEP until you see the message:
SINGLE RCVR: D1
ON DATE

Press TANK/SENSOR to choose the destination (D1, D2, etc.) you want to set up. Choose the frequency you
want for this destination by following the appropriate Auto-Dial Frequency instructions, beginning on page 6-11.
NOTE: Do not press ENTER after changing the destination. You must choose the Auto-Dial Frequency, as
described in the previous sections, before pressing ENTER.

CONTINUE COMMUNICATIONS SETUP
If you are finished setting up the Auto-Dial Frequency, press STEP, if necessary, until you see the message:
AUTO DIAL SETUP
PRESS 

This screen displays for modem modules only. Press STEP to continue.

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup
IMPORTANT! Before you set up this feature, you must enter information for the In-Tank Setup function and set up
all the sensors in your system. If an alarm occurs while you are setting up this feature and you have not set up intank and sensor information yet, the system will try to send a report. This action may cause a system lockout.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTO DIAL ALARM SETUP
PRESS 

6-15

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup

Through the Auto Dial Alarm Setup, you can tell the system to send reports of alarm conditions to the programmed
destinations. Choose No, if you do not wish to send a report for a particular alarm condition, or Yes if you do want
the alarm reported.

IN-TANK ALARMS
Press ENTER in response to the AUTO DIAL ALARM SETUP message.The system displays the message:
D1: (Destination)
IN-TANK ALARMS: NO

To accept no transmission of In-Tank Alarm reports to the selected destination (D1, D2, etc.), press STEP.
For transmission of In-Tank Alarm reports to the selected destination, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The
system confirms your choice with the message:
IN-TANK ALARMS: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
D1: IN-TANK ALARMS
LEAK: NO TANKS

This message shows the first kind of alarm condition for In-Tank Alarms: Leak. You must tell the system whether to
send reports about the displayed alarm condition for No Tanks, All Tanks, or Single Tanks. To choose No Tanks,
press STEP.
To choose All Tanks, press CHANGE once. To choose Single Tanks, press CHANGE twice. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice. If ALL TANKS is selected, the system displays:
LEAK: ALL TANKS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to specify the tanks for the next In-Tank Alarm condition (HIGH WATER). Repeat the steps described
above for each of the In-Tank Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).
To choose Single Tanks, press CHANGE twice in response to the LEAK: NO TANKS message. Then press
ENTER. The system displays the message:
LEAK: SINGLE TANKS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays:
D1: (Destination)
T1: LEAK: NO

Press TANK/SENSOR to select the desired tank, then press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays
the message:
R1: T1 LEAK: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press TANK/SENSOR to select additional tanks for the In-Tank Leak alarm. When you have specified all tanks for
the first In-Tank alarm, press STEP to advance to the next alarm. Repeat the steps described above to assign tanks
for each In-Tank alarm. After you have specified tanks for each In-Tank alarm condition, press STEP to advance to
the next alarm group.

6-16

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup

REMAINING ALARM GROUPS
Continue to step through all of the available alarm groups, selecting the various alarms from the groups that you
want to send to the selected destination (D1, D2, etc.). The procedure for bypassing or selecting alarms from each
group and then assigning them to a device in that group is the same as discussed for In-Tank alarms above.
Only installed components will display, so some of the alarm groups shown below may not appear.

LIQUID SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
LIQUID SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Liquid Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

VAPOR SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
VAPOR SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Vapor Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

EXTERNAL INPUTS ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
EXTERNAL INPUTS: NO

Select the External Inputs Alarm to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

LINE LEAK ALARMS (VLLD)
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
LINE LEAK ALARMS: NO

Select the Line Leak (Volumetric) Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

GROUNDWATER SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
GROUNDWATER ALMS: NO

Select the Groundwater Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

6-17

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup

2 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
2 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select the 2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

3 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
3 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select the 3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

RECEIVER ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
RECEIVER ALARMS: NO

Select the Receiver Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

POWER SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
POWER SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select the Power Side DIM Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

RECONCILIATION ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
RECONCILIATION ALM: NO

Select the Reconciliation Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (PLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
PRESSURE LINE LEAK: NO

Select the Pressure Line Leak Detector Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

6-18

6 Communications Setup

Auto-Dial Alarm Setup

WIRELESS PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (WPLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
WPLLD LINE LEAK: NO

Select the WPLLD Line Leak Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

COMMUNICATION SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
COMM SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select the Communication Side DIM Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

SMART SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
SMART SENSOR ALM: NO

Select the Smart Sensor Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

PUMP RELAY MONITOR ALARM
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Name)
PUMP ALARM: NO

Select Pump Relay Monitor Alarm (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

VMCI DISPENSER INTERFACE ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
VMCI ALARM: NO

Select the VMCI Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

VMC ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
D1: (Destination)
VMC ALARM: NO

Select the VMC Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Table 6-2).

6-19

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

SETTING UP AUTO-DIAL ALARMS FOR ADDITIONAL DESTINATIONS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTO DIAL ALARM SETUP
PRESS 

If you have additional destinations to which to send alarms, press ENTER. The system displays the message:
D1: (Destination)
IN-TANK ALARMS: NO

Press TANK/SENSOR to select another destination (D1, D2, etc.). Repeat the procedures described above
beginning with the section entitled “In-Tank Alarms” on page 6-16.

RS-232 End of Message
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
RS-232 END OF MESSAGE
DISABLED

This feature notifies the receiver that the message is complete. The default value is disabled. To enable the feature
so that an end of message character is sent by the RS-232 command, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The
system confirms your choice with the message:
ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press FUNCTION to exit.

6-20

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

.
Table 6-2. Alarm List
In-Tank Alarms

LEAK
HIGH WATER
OVERFILL
LOW PRODUCT
SUDDEN LOSS
HI PRODUCT
INVALID HGT
PROBE OUT
WATER WARN
DLVY NEEDED
MAX PRODUCT
GROSS FAIL
PERIOD FAIL
ANNUAL FAIL
PER NEED WN
ANN NEED WN
PER NEED AL
ANN NEED AL
TEST NOTIFY
NoIDLE TIME
SIPHON BRK
CSLD INCR
ACCU WARN
RECON WARN
RECON ALARM
LOW TEMP
TICKET WARN
GROSS LN TK
DLVY DEN WRN
FUEL QUAL

6-21

NOTE: A strikethrough an
alarm condition means that
you will see the condition in
the sequence.

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

Table 6-2. Alarm List
Liquid Sensor Alarms

FUEL
OPEN1
SHORT
WATER
WATER OUT
HIGH LIQUID
LOW LIQUID
LIQ WARNING

Vapor Sensor Alarms

FUEL
OPEN1
SHORT
WATER
WATER OUT
HIGH LIQUID
LOW LIQUID
LIQ WARNING

External Inputs Alarm
1Sensor

CLOSED

Out alarm

6-22

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

Table 6-2. Alarm List
VLLD Alarms

SHUTDOWN
SELF WARN
HANDLE WARN
GROSS LINE
GROSS LSELF
GROSS PUMP
GROSS PSELF
PER NEED WN
ANN NEED WN
PER NEED AL
ANN NEED AL
PER LINE
PER LSELF
PER PUMP
PER PSELF
ANN LINE
ANN LSELF
ANN PUMP
ANN PSELF
PRESS WARN
PRESS ALM
TST FLT GRS
TST FLT PER
TST FLT ANN
FUEL OUT

Groundwater Sensor Alarms

FUEL
OPEN1
SHORT
WATER
WATER OUT
HIGH LIQUID
LOW LIQUID
LIQ WARNING

1Sensor

Out alarm

6-23

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

Table 6-2. Alarm List
2-Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms

FUEL
OPEN1
SHORT
WATER
WATER OUT
HIGH LIQUID
LOW LIQUID
LIQ WARNING

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms

FUEL
OPEN1
SHORT
WATER
WATER OUT
HIGH LIQUID
LOW LIQUID
LIQ WARNING

Receiver Alarms

SERVICE REPORT WARN
ALARM CLEAR WARNING
DELIVERY REPORT WRN
NO DIAL TONE ALARM
DEL NOTIFICATION

Power Side DIM Alarms

DISABLED
COMM ERROR

Reconciliation Alarms

REC THRHOLD
CLOSE SHIFT
CLOSE DAILY

1Sensor

Out alarm

6-24

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

Table 6-2. Alarm List
PLLD Alarms

GROSS FAIL
ANN LN FAIL
PER NEED WN
PER NEED AL
OPEN ALARM
SHUTDOWN
PERIOD FAIL
ANN NEED WN
ANN NEED AL
LO PRES ALM
HANDLE ALRM
FUEL OUT
LN EQ FAULT

WPLLD Alarms

GROSS FAIL
PERIOD FAIL
PER NEED WN
PER NEED AL
OPEN ALARM
COMM ALARM
SHUTDOWN
ANN LN FAIL
ANN NEED WN
ANN NEED AL
HANDLE ALRM
FUEL OUT
LN EQ FAULT

Comm Side DIM Alarms

DISABLED
COMM ERROR
TRANS ALARM

Smart Sensor Alarms

SETUP WARN
COMM ALARM
SENSR FAULT
FUEL WARN
FUEL ALARM
WATER WARN

6-25

6 Communications Setup

RS-232 End of Message

Table 6-2. Alarm List
Smart Sensor Alarms

WATER ALARM
HI LIQ WRN
HI LIQ ALM
LOW LIQ WRN
LOW LIQ ALM
TEMP WARN
RELAY ACTIVE
INSTALL ALM
SNSR FLT WRN
VACUUM WARN
NO VAC ALM

Pump Relay Monitor
Alarm

PUMP ALARM

VMCI Dispenser Interface Alarms

DISABLED

VMC Alarms

COM TIMEOUT
METR NC ALM
SHUTDWN WRN
SHUTDWN ALM

6-26

7

In-Tank Setup

The In-Tank Setup function allows you to enter information about your tanks and the products they contain. Also,
through this function you set up the monitoring, reporting, and alarm features for each tank.
You must enter data individually for each connected tank.

Selecting the In-Tank Setup Function
To select In-Tank Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
IN-TANK SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Tank Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TANK CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT #: X X X X

Use the message shown above to tell the system which of the four probe positions on a module are connected to
probes.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES IN-TANK PROBES
If in-tank probes are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot location(s) of Probe Interface
Module(s). It also establishes a module number based on slot location. For example, if modules are installed in
slots #3 and #4, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1 and the module in slot #4 becomes
module #2.
As you specify which positions on a module are connected to probes, the system establishes a number for each
probe that corresponds to the probe’s position on the module. For example, if there is a probe connected to
positions 2 and 3 of module 1, the probe for position 2 becomes T2 and the probe for position 3 becomes T3.
To indicate that a probe position on the module is connected to a probe, choose the number corresponding to that
position. For example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected to
a probe, choose X for that position.

SPECIFYING IN-TANK PROBE POSITIONS
To specify whether position 1 is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the position is
connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again until the
correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all four probe positions. When you
have entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following
message:
SLOT # - 1 2 3 4
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

7-1

7 In-Tank Setup

Product Labels

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the TANK CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 2 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configuration information (probe positions) for all modules and the system
displays the ENTER PRODUCT LABEL message.

Product Labels
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER PRODUCT LABEL
T1:

Enter the type of fuel (e.g., Diesel, Unleaded, etc.) in the selected tank, identified in the second line of the
message. In international installations, the first two characters of the product label will be sent to third party
equipment as a GRADE label, i.e., UL UNLEADED will send “UL.”
To enter the type of fuel in the tank, press CHANGE. Enter an alphanumeric label for any system-compatible fluid
fuel. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
T1: (Product Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Product Code
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
PRODUCT CODE: 1

Enter the alphanumeric code used by a point-of-sale terminal or other external device to identify product for
inventory control purposes.
NOTE: Many point of sale and pump control devices within the United Kingdom use 4* to indicate “Four Star”
premium grade petrol. The asterisk * is entered by pressing the zero key 5 times.
To enter the product code for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the alphanumeric code. Press ENTER to
confirm your entry. The system displays:
PRODUCT CODE: X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

7-2

7 In-Tank Setup

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
THERMAL COEFF: 0.00000

If this is a siphon manifolded secondary tank, this window will not appear.

To ensure proper leak test performance, you must enter the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for the fuel in each
tank. The system requires these values to establish proper temperature compensation factors during a leak test
and for use in calculating temperature compensated volume and density.
If you know your product’s thermal coefficient enter that value. Otherwise refer to Table 7-1 for list of typical
thermal coefficients for various fuels and liquids:
Table 7-1.- Typical Thermal Coefficients
Thermal
Coefficient
(U.S. Units)

Thermal
Coefficient
(Metric Units)

AdBlue or DEF

0.00040

0.00022

Alcohol

0.00063

0.00114

Aviation Gas

0.00075

0.00135

Diesel (fuel oil #2) [DERV]

0.00045

0.00081

 Biodiesel (B20)

0.00045

0.00081

 Biodiesel (B100)

0.00044

0.00079

Ethylene Glycol

0.00037

0.00067

Fuel Oil #4

0.00047

0.00085

Gasohol

0.00069

0.00125

Gear Oil, 90W

0.00047

0.00085

Hydraulic Oil

0.00047

0.00085

Jet Fuel

0.00047

0.00085

Kerosene (fuel oil #1) [Paraffin]

0.00050

0.00090

Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)

0.00160

0.00288

Leaded

0.00070

0.00126

Motor Oil

0.00047

0.00085

Premium [4 Star]

0.00070

0.00126

Regular Unleaded

0.00070

0.00126

Super Unleaded

0.00070

0.00126

Low benzene unleaded petrol

0.00070

0.00126

Transmission Fluid

0.00047

0.00085

Turbine Oil

0.00047

0.00085

Product

7-3

7 In-Tank Setup

Tank Density

Table 7-1.- Typical Thermal Coefficients
Thermal
Coefficient
(U.S. Units)

Thermal
Coefficient
(Metric Units)

Water

0.00012

0.00022

Washer Fluid

0.00047

0.00085

Used Oil

0.00044

0.00079

Product

To enter the Thermal Coefficient, press CHANGE and enter the coefficient in U.S. or Metric units, depending on
the units specified in System Setup (Be careful to add the correct number of zeros to the right of the
decimal point. An incorrect entry can cause test failures and other problems).
Contact your authorized Veeder-Root Service Representative for thermal coefficients for British Imperial units.
Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
THERMAL COEFF: 0.000XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Tank Density
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
DENSITY

:0.0000

If Mass/Density is disabled
this window will not appear!

A value of 0 indicates that the density for the product in this tank has not been entered, or a delivery has ocurred,
or the thermal coefficient changed. For Tank Density enter any one of the product’s values below (units are not
entered):

• Mass per unit volume at reference temperature (density),
• Specific Gravity,
• API number
• A fourth way to enter Density is by entering the known Thermal Coefficient of the product in the tank (in the
setup step above) and letting the console automatically calculate Tank Density using the Thermal Coefficient
value (density value is not displayed).
If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the density of the product in this tank as shown in the example below:
T1: (Product Label)
DENSITY

:5.9987

Press ENTER:
DENSITY
:5.9987
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If this value is accepted, it will be converted to actual density (but the user entered value is displayed).

7-4

7 In-Tank Setup

Tank Diameter

NOTE: A Setup Data Warning is posted from the time the Mass/Density feature is enabled until a density or
thermal coefficient value is entered for that tank, clearing the alarm.
Press STEP to continue.

Tank Diameter
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK DIAMETER: 000.00

Enter the inside diameter of the selected tank (for a linear tank, enter the inside tank height in place of the tank’s
inside diameter). You can find this dimension on the Tank Chart. To enter the diameter, press CHANGE, enter the
diameter, then press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
TANK DIAMETER: XXX.XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Tank Profile
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK PROFILE 1PT

Use this display to select the number of height/volume values you wish to enter for the tank. The system will use
these values, along with the Tank’s inside diameter (or height), to interpolate volume readings along the entire
length of the probe.

TANK PROFILE SELECTIONS
1 point
This method requires only the 100% (full) volume to profile the tank. This selection is used for horizontally installed,
flat-ended cylindrical tanks, and should be selected when AccuChart is available for this type tank.
4 Points
This method requires 4 volumes to profile the tank. The requested volumes are at percentages of height (e.g., the
75% volume of a 96” diameter tank = the volume at a height which is 75% of 96” or 72”). This selection can be
used for all rounded- and dished-end tanks, and should be selected when AccuChart is available for these type
tanks.
20 points
This method requires 20 volumes to profile the tank. The requested volumes are at percentages of height (e.g., the
5% volume of a 96” diameter tank = the volume at a height which is 5% of 96” or 4.8”). This selection can be
used for all rounded- and dished-end tanks.
50 Points
This method requires entry of height/volumes pairs for up to 50 points to profile the tank (tank diameter/full volume
is counted as one of the 50 points). It is recommended that these pairs be derived by strapping the tank. This
selection can be used for all tanks.

7-5

7 In-Tank Setup

Full Volume

Linear
This method requires only the 100% (full) volume to profile the tank. When using the linear tank profile you must
enter the inside height of the tank in place of the inside diameter of the tank in Tank Diameter setup (see above).
This profile can be used for flat-ended cylindrical tanks standing on end and for rectangular tanks.

PROCEDURE
To accept the Tank Profile shown on the TANK PROFILE message, press STEP. (The system displays the FULL
VOL message.)
To change the Tank Profile, press CHANGE until the desired profile appears. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.
The system displays:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK PROFILE 1PT

To accept the displayed tank profile, press STEP to continue. To select another tank profile, 4 pt, 20 pt, Linear, or
50 pt, press CHANGE until the desired profile is displayed:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK PROFILE: XXXXXX

Press ENTER:
CLEAR EXISTING PROFILE
ARE YOU SURE? : NO

If sure, press CHANGE:
CLEAR EXISTING PROFILE
ARE YOU SURE? : YES

Press ENTER to confirm:

These messages appear when 50 pt profile is selected.
Changing profile selection will erase the previously
entered 50 point profile!

ARE YOU SURE? : YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Full Volume
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
FULL VOL: 000000

To enter the full volume of the tank (100% height) press CHANGE. Enter the volume in gallons or litres, depending
on the units established in System Setup. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
FULL VOL: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

7-6

7 In-Tank Setup

Full Volume

4 OR 20 POINT TANK PROFILES HEIGHT/VOLUME ENTRIES
If you selected 4 or 20 points for Tank Profile press STEP and the system prompts you for additional volumes at
specified heights in the tank. Calculate these values from the Tank Chart. Note: for both profiles (4 or 20 pt), these
volumes are requested as a percentage (e.g., 75% volume means the volume at a point 75% of the height. For a
96” diameter tank with a full volume of 10000 gallons, 75% volume would be the volume at 72”, not 75% of
10,000 gallons). Repeat the procedure described above to enter each prompted volume. When all volumes are
entered, press STEP.

50 POINT TANK PROFILE HEIGHT/VOLUME ENTRIES (TANK CHART SECURITY DISABLED)
If you selected 50 points for Tank Profile and Tank Chart Security is disabled, press STEP and the system displays:
T1: VIEW HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 
See Paragraph A below

Press STEP

T1: ADD HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 
See Paragraph B below

Press STEP

T1: REMOVE HEIGHT/VOL PT
PRESS 
See Paragraph C below

A - Viewing Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: VIEW HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 

Press ENTER to view the 50 points (top down) and the display appears:
T1: (Product Label)
92.16 INCH VOL: 009800

This example shows the first height/volume point in a
96” diameter, 10,000 gallon tank

Continue to press STEP to view remaining height/volume points in descending order by height.
B - Adding Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: ADD HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 

Press ENTER to add a height/volume point and the display appears:
T1: (Product Label)
HEIGHT : 000000

7-7

7 In-Tank Setup

Full Volume

Press CHANGE, enter the height:
T1: (Product Label)
HEIGHT : 88.32

Press ENTER:
HEIGHT : 88.32
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
T1: (Product Label)
88.32 INCH VOL : 000000

Press CHANGE, enter the volume at this height:
T1: (Product Label)
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200

Press ENTER to accept the entry:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP and follow the above procedure to continue adding height/volume points until you are finished.
C - Removing Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: REMOVE HEIGHT/VOL PT
PRESS 

Press ENTER and if necessary, press STEP until you display the height/volume point you want to remove:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
T1 : REMOVE: NO

Press CHANGE:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
T1 : REMOVE: YES

Press ENTER to confirm:
T1 : REMOVE: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP and follow the above procedure to continue removing height/volume points until you are finished.

7-8

7 In-Tank Setup

Full Volume

50 POINT TANK PROFILE ENTRIES WITH TANK CHART SECURITY ENABLED
If you selected 50 points for Tank Profile AND Tank Chart Security has been enabled, press STEP and the system
displays:
TANK PROFILE
: 50 PTS
ENTER PASSCODE->_______<

Enter the 6-digit numeric passcode and press ENTER:

T1: (Product Label)
FULL VOL: 000000

To enter the full volume of the tank (100% height) press CHANGE. Enter the volume in gallons or litres, depending
on the units established in System Setup (NOTE: Full Volume cannot be a volume less than the largest tank chart
volume). Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
FULL VOL: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK CAPACITY

: 000000

The Weights and Measures Officer presses CHANGE and enters the tank capacity. Press ENTER to accept the
value and press STEP to continue:
T1: (Product Label)
PROBE S/N

This display is view-only display and shows the serial number of the probe installed in the tank.
: XXXXXX

Press STEP to continue:
T1: VIEW HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 
See Paragraph D below

Press STEP

T1: ADD HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 
See Paragraph E below

Press STEP

T1: REMOVE HEIGHT/VOL PT
PRESS 
See Paragraph F below

7-9

7 In-Tank Setup

Full Volume

D - Viewing Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: VIEW HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 

Press ENTER to view the 50 points (top down) and the display appears:
T1: (Product Label)
92.16 INCH VOL: 009800

This example shows the first height/volume point in a
96” diameter, 10,000 gallon tank

Continue to press STEP to view remaining height/volume points in descending order by height.
E - Adding Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: ADD HEIGHT/VOL PTS
PRESS 

Press ENTER to add a height/volume point and the display appears:
T1: (Product Label)
HEIGHT : 000000

Press CHANGE, enter the height:
T1: (Product Label)
HEIGHT : 88.32

Press ENTER:
HEIGHT : 88.32
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
T1: (Product Label)
88.32 INCH VOL : 000000

Press CHANGE, enter the volume at this height:
T1: (Product Label)
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200

Press ENTER to accept the entry:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP and follow the above procedure to continue adding height/volume points until you are finished.

7-10

7 In-Tank Setup

Meter Data Present

F - Removing Height/Volume Points
At the display below:
T1: REMOVE HEIGHT/VOL PT
PRESS 

Press ENTER and if necessary, press STEP until you display the height/volume point you want to remove:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
T1 : REMOVE: NO

Press CHANGE:
88.32 INCH VOL : 9200
T1 : REMOVE: YES

Press ENTER to confirm:
T1 : REMOVE: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP and follow the above procedure to continue removing height/volume points until you are finished.

Meter Data Present
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
METER DATA PRESENT: NO

When this feature is enabled, all meter data collected from the dispensers will be reported to the system. If
dispenser data for this tank is being reported to the DIM (i.e., meter data present), then this parameter MUST be
set to YES.
To enable the feature, press CHANGE then ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
METER DATA PRESENT: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Vapor Loss Factor - International Option
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
VAPOR LOSS FACTOR: 0.00%

Ticketed Delivery must be enabled for this menu
to appear.

Press CHANGE and enter the vapor loss factor. Allowable range 0.00 (default) to 0.20%. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice.
Press STEP to continue.

7-11

7 In-Tank Setup

End Factor

End Factor
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
END FACTOR: NONE

NOTE: This message appears only if you select METER DATA PRESENT: YES.
The End Factor allows you to select an end shape type (if known) to improve the AccuChart height-to-volume
calculations. Press CHANGE to view your choices. The default setting of NONE automatically bypasses the End
Factor entry and determines tank profile based upon your selection in the “Tank Profile” entry on page 7-5.
Selecting FLAT = an End Factor of 0. Selecting HEMISPHER = an End Factor of 1. Selecting OTHER displays
the message:
T1: (Product Label)
END VALUE: X.X

If you select NONE, FLAT, or HEMISPHER(E), press ENTER when that choice is visible, then STEP.
If you select OTHER, press ENTER and the End Value message appears. Press CHANGE, enter an End Value of
from 0 to 1.0 in 0.1 increments (0.3 is the recommended end value for dished-end tanks), press ENTER, then
STEP.

Calibration Update
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
CAL UPDATE: IMMEDIATE

Note: This message appears only if you select METER DATA PRESENT: YES. Note for international installations,
CAL UPDATE will be PERIODIC if HRM is enabled.
IMPORTANT! For proper setup and operation of this feature, you should:
1. Pressure-test all lines for tightness prior to startup.
2. Calibrate all dispensing meters “on strike” or within one cubic inch per five gallons (8.65 centilitres per 10 litres
[0.865%]).
3. Run all tanks over as wide a range of fuel levels as possible for the first 56 days of operation to improve
calibration accuracy.
When this feature is enabled, you can control when AccuChart updates the calibration chart. The product volume
of your tank may be recalculated when AccuChart updates the calibration chart. If you are performing manual
reconciliation, you will probably want to control when AccuChart changes the product volume of your tank.
AccuChart Features
AccuChart is permitted in line, siphon, or a combination of line and siphon manifolded tanks with the following
restrictions:

• A siphon manifolded set can have no more than 2 tanks.
• There can be no more than 4 sets of siphon manifolded tanks per system.
• AccuChart does not work on manifolded tanks with a BDIM.

7-12

7 In-Tank Setup

Float Size

• Entering a Tank Tilt value is not recommended if the system is performing automatic Business Inventory
Reconciliation and AccuChart.
Calibration Update Selections
To change the method for calibration updates, press CHANGE until the desired method appears. Descriptions of
the available update methods are listed below.

• Immediate--This method provides the most accurate reconciliation results. It is designed for customers using
BIR reports for reconciliation. All calibrations and any resulting changes in product volume go into effect
immediately, as they occur. Changes to the product volume will not generate BIR variance errors.

• Periodic--This method is designed for customers performing manual reconciliation. It allows a maximum of two
changes to product volume, as a result of AccuChart’s calibration. The first calibration update occurs 28 days
from the startup of AccuChart and the second calibration update occurs 56 days from the startup of AccuChart.

• Complete--This method is also designed for customers performing manual reconciliation. It is similar to the
Periodic method, except that it allows only one change to product volume, as a result of AccuChart’s calibration.
The only calibration update occurs 56 days from the startup of AccuChart.

• Never--This setting is used by customers who want to disable AccuChart (two reasons are discussed below).
Height to volume calculations are performed by using the values entered by the customer for diameter, tilt, and
capacity. If the customer changes the method from Never to one of the other methods, the other method goes
into effect immediately.
1. For PLLD installations with line manifolded tanks, the master tank’s check valve’s relief pressure must be
below the pump’s operating pressure. AccuChart will run when there is line manifolding with PLLD line leak
detection; however, you should disable AccuChart if the results are poor.
2. AccuChart also cannot support ISTs if they are communicating to each other. The same is true of Red
Jacket’s CPT and any other configuration where all pumps are On (e.g., Dispensing mode = All [see page 10-7,
page 11-6, or page 15-2 as appropriate]). Disconnecting the ISTs/CPTs links and/or selecting Sequential or
Alternate dispense modes during the calibration period would overcome this limitation.
Press ENTER to confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.

Float Size
This display requires that you enter the installed Mag probe float size.
T1: (Product Label)
FLOAT SIZE: 3.0 IN.

Enter the float size installed on the tank’s probe: 4-, 3-, 2-, or 1-inch (101 mm, 76 mm, 50 mm, or 25 mm), 4.0 IN.
PS or Custom. The system automatically recognizes which Mag probe type you have installed and will display only
the applicable float size options. Only select "Custom" if the literature that was shipped with the float specifically
states that you must choose this float size selection, i.e., Chem-ISO and LPG-ISO probes. The installation
literature accompanying Chem-ISO and LPG-ISO probes will list the required values to enter.
Press CHANGE to display the float size you installed (for Custom, see literature accompanying float), then press
ENTER to confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.

7-13

7 In-Tank Setup

Water Warning

Water Warning
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
WATER WARNING: 00:0

NOTE: This message does not appear for tanks in which high alcohol probes are installed.
Water Warning identifies a high water level in the bottom of the tank [see Figure 7-1]. It acts as a pre-warning to
the High Water Limit. Set this value at a lower level than High Water Limit.
To enter the Water Warning value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the limit in inches (5.0 maximum) or
millimeters (199 maximum), depending on the units established in System Setup. Press ENTER to confirm your
entry. The system displays:
WATER WARNING: XX.X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

11

1

10
2

9

3

8
7
4
6
5
consoles\tnkalm1.eps

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. Probe Canister (Reference)
2. Probe
3. Product
4. High Water Limit
5. Water Warning
6. Pump Pickup (Reference)

7. Low Product
8. Delivery Limit
9. Overfill Limit
10. High Product
11. Max or Label Vol

Figure 7-1. Relative Positions of Tank Alarm Limits

7-14

7 In-Tank Setup

High Water Limit

High Water Limit
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
HIGH WATER LIMIT: 0:0

Note: This message does not appear for tanks in which high alcohol probes are installed.
When water in the tank rises to this High Water Limit value, the system triggers an alarm. Set this value at a level
lower than the pickup for the submersible pump or suction line [see Figure 7-1].
To enter the High Water Limit value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the limit in inches (5.0 maximum)
or millimeters (199 maximum), depending on the units established in System Setup. Press ENTER to confirm your
entry. The system displays:
HIGH WATER LIMIT: X.X
PRESS STEP TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Water Alarm Filter
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
WATER ALARM FILTER: LOW

Note: This message does not appear for tanks in which high alcohol probes are installed.
The water alarm filter allows the user to determine the response time of the water alarm during a delivery. The
default filter setting of Low will provide the quickest response time but may be susceptible to false alarms if the
turbulence caused by a delivery disturbs the water float. In most applications the water filter setting of Low will not
produce false water alarms. Adjustments to the delivery fill tube may eliminate false water alarms caused by
delivery turbulence. If deliveries are causing an unacceptable number of false water alarms, raise the water filter
level to Medium. If the false water alarms continue, raise the filter level to High.
Press CHANGE to select a different filter, press ENTER to confirm the change, then STEP; otherwise press STEP
to continue.

Max or Label Vol
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
MAX OR LABEL VOL: 000000

Maximum or Label Volume (in international installations this is considered safe working capacity) alarm warns when
the level of fluid in the tank exceeds the volume you enter here. Set this value at a level higher than the High Level
Limit [see Figure 7-1].

7-15

7 In-Tank Setup

Overfill Limit

Press CHANGE and enter the value. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
MAX OR LABEL VOL: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Overfill Limit
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
OVERFILL LIMIT: 000%

Overfill Limit warns of a potential overfill only during a bulk delivery. When the volume reaches this limit, the system
can activate an on-site overfill alarm and trigger a printout showing the tank #, date, time, and product. Set this
percentage no greater than 90% of the tank’s capacity (in international installations set this percentage no greater
than 99% of label volume) see Figure 7-1.
Press CHANGE. Enter the percent limit and press ENTER to confirm your entry:
OVERFILL LIMIT: XX%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

High Product
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
HIGH PRODUCT: 000%

High Product warns when the volume of fluid in the tank exceeds the value you enter here. The High Product alarm
occurs whenever this value is exceeded, whether or not a delivery is in progress.
In U.S. installations this is especially useful in applications such as used oil holding tanks, where the rate of fill can
be too gradual for the system to recognize the increase as a delivery and activate the Overfill Limit. It can trigger
the same alarm indications as Overfill Limit. Set this limit at a percentage that is between the Overfill Limit
percentage and 95% (of the tank’s capacity) [see Figure 7-1].
In international installations, this is especially useful to warn of an impending overfill. It can trigger the same alarm
indications as Overfill Limit. Set this limit to 98% if the label volume is greater than 25,000 litres and to 96% if the
label volume is less than 25,000 litres.
Press CHANGE. Enter the percent limit. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
HIGH PRODUCT: XX%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

7-16

7 In-Tank Setup

Delivery Limit

Delivery Limit
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
DELIVERY LIMIT: 000%

Delivery Limit warns when the level of fluid in the tank drops to a level at which the operator calls for a delivery. Set
this percentage at a volume higher than that of the Low Product alarm [see Figure 7-1].
Press CHANGE. Enter the percent limit. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:

DELIVERY LIMIT: XX%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Low Product
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
LOW PRODUCT: 000000

Low Product warns when volume in a tank recedes to the level you enter here [see Figure 7-1].
In international installations, assuming no water in the tank, this limit should be set no lower than: the tank volume
at 250 mm for Mag probe types 8473, or the tank volume at 125 mm for Mag probe types 8493 (these are the
minimum volumes that can be measured by each probe type).
Press CHANGE. Enter the volume. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
LOW PRODUCT: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Leak Alarm Limit
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
LEAK ALARM LIMIT: 00

During a leak test, Leak Alarm Limit warns when the cumulative temperature compensated product loss from a
tank reaches the limit value. The system automatically interprets the limit you enter as a negative. It is not
necessary to enter the minus (-) sign.
The Leak Alarm Limit is intended to identify and warn of large losses of product during a leak test. Small changes
in fuel conditions can cause temporary variations in fuel level reading that balance out over the duration of a test in
a tight tank.
To prevent false reports and alarms from being triggered, do not set the limit value to identify losses of 0.2 gph
(0.76 lph) or less during the test period. The Leak Limit should be set to identify losses of 1 gph (4 lph) or greater.

7-17

7 In-Tank Setup

Sudden Loss Limit

Consider the leak rate you wish to identify and the length of the test when determining a limit value. A limit value of
8 gallons (32 litres) will warn of a 1 gph (4 lph) leak in 8 hours or a 2 gph (8 lph) leak in 4 hours.
To enter the Leak Alarm Limit, press CHANGE. Enter the limit in gallons (from 1 to 99) or litres (from 4 to 399),
depending on the units set up in System Units. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
LEAK ALARM LIMIT: XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Sudden Loss Limit
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
SUDDEN LOSS LIMIT: 000000

Sudden Loss Limit immediately warns of a sudden loss of fuel during a leak test. It is not based on temperaturecompensated volume and is intended to identify losses larger than the Leak Alarm Limit. Typically, you should set
this limit at 25 gallons or 100 litres, or higher.
To enter the Sudden Loss Limit for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the limit in gallons or litres,
depending on the units specified in System Setup. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
SUDDEN LOSS LIMIT: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Tank Tilt
The following Tank Tilt procedure is for U.S. installations. For international installations, see Appendix A.
Consoles w/ BIR only--Entering a Tank Tilt value is not recommended if the system is performing automatic
Business Inventory Reconciliation and AccuChart.
If the probe is installed in the center of the tank, the value is 000.00 U.S.; 0000.0 Metric.

CALCULATING TANK TILT (H2)
Use the worksheet below to record measurements and perform Tank Tilt calculations for each of the tanks.
1. Stick the tank at the fill riser opening at least three times. Record the average reading in column A of the chart.
2. Before beginning this step, make sure the Tank Tilt in the display above = 0. Record the probe’s Fuel Height (In-Tank
Inventory Function) reading in column B of the chart.
3. Subtract the value entered in column B from the value entered in column A. Record the result in column C.
4. Measure the distance in inches (or millimeters if you use Metric Units) between the probe and fill risers. Record the
measurement in column D.
5. Divide the value in column C by column D to determine the pitch. Record the results in column E.
6. Measure the distance in inches or millimetres from the probe riser to the center of the tank. Record the distance in column
F.
7. Multiply column E by column F to determine Tank Tilt (E X F = Tank Tilt Value). Record the value in column G.

7-18

7 In-Tank Setup

Probe Offset

ENTERING THE TANK TILT VALUE
Table 7-2.- Tank Tilt Calculation Worksheet

Tank
No.

A
Stick
Gauge
Avg. Height
@ Fill Riser

B
Probe’s Fuel
Height
Reading
(Probe Riser)

C
(A - B = C)

D
Distance
Fill to Probe
Risers

E
Pitch
(C / D = E)

F
Distance from
Probe Riser to
Center of Tank

G
Tank Tilt*
(E x F = G)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
*Tank Tilt may be a positive (+) or negative (-) value. If it is a negative value, BE SURE to change the value symbol to minus (-)
when entering a negative Tank Tilt value.

To enter the Tank Tilt value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. If the value is negative, press the +/- key so that
a minus (-) sign appears on the display. Enter the value as calculated according to the above procedures. Press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:

TANK TILT: ±XXX.XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Probe Offset
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
PROBE OFFSET: +0000.00

This offset is intended for installations in which the probe is not resting on the bottom of the tank. The value you
enter (the distance off bottom) is continually added to the product height, but only to the water height when the
water float exceeds a minimum level. The allowable range is -144.0 to +144.0 inches (-3657.6 to +3657.6 mm);
the default value is 0 inches.

7-19

7 In-Tank Setup

Siphon Manifolded Tank Status

Siphon Manifolded Tank Status
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: SIPHON MANIFOLDED
T#: 00,00,00,00,00,00,00

This entry tells the system which tanks are siphon manifolded together (see Figure 7-2), allowing the system to
provide cumulative volume information on product stored in a siphon manifolded tank set. You only need to enter
this information for one of the tanks in the set. The system automatically enters the information for the other tank(s)
in the set.

1

2

3

consoles\siphon1.eps

4

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. To dispenser
2. Pump

3. T1
4. T2
Figure 7-2. Siphon Manifolded Tanks

For example, if you are entering setup information for Tank #1 as in the figure, and it is manifolded with Tank #2,
you would press CHANGE until 02 appears (you would press the Right-Arrow key to move to the next field if
another tank were in the group, then press CHANGE until that tank’s number appeared). Press ENTER when you
are done making these changes. (Since you are connecting tanks 1 and 2 in this example, you would just STEP
past this procedure when you are entering the setup for tank 2 (and any additional tank in the set).
Press STEP to continue.

Line Manifolded Tank Status
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T3: LINE MANIFOLDED
T#: 00,00,00,00,00,00,00

7-20

7 In-Tank Setup

Leak Minimum Periodic

This entry tells the system which tanks are line manifolded together (see Figure 7-3), allowing the system to
provide cumulative volume information on product stored in a line manifolded tank set. You only need to enter this
information for one of the tanks in the line manifolded set. The system automatically enters the information for the
other tank (s) in the set. For example, if you are entering setup information for Tank #3 as shown in the figure, and
it is line manifolded with Tank #1 (itself in a siphon manifolded set), you would press CHANGE until 01 appears
(you would press the Right-Arrow key to move to the next field if another tank were in the line manifolded set, then
press CHANGE until that tank’s number appeared). Press ENTER when you are done making these changes.
Press STEP to continue.
in the set.

1

consoles\l&s.eps

3
2

4

5

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. To dispenser
2. T1
3. Pumps

4. T2
5. T3

Figure 7-3.

Line Manifolding A Siphon Manifolded Set To A Single Tank

Leak Minimum Periodic
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
LEAK MIN PERIODIC: 000%

This value tells the system the minimum tank volume required to record a passed periodic test. The value reflects
federal, state, and local requirements.

7-21

7 In-Tank Setup

Leak Minimum Annual

To enter a Leak Minimum Periodic value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the percent value and press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
LEAK MIN PERIODIC: XXX%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Leak Minimum Annual
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
LEAK MIN ANNUAL: 000%

This value tells the system the minimum tank volume required to record a passed annual test. The value reflects
federal, state, and local requirements.
To enter a Leak Minimum Annual value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the percent value and press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
LEAK MIN ANNUAL: XXX%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Periodic Test Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: PERIODIC TEST TYPE
STANDARD

You can choose between Standard and Quick. Choose Standard to run a 2-hour periodic leak test. Choose Quick
to perform a 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) test in one hour.
To choose Standard, press STEP. (The system displays the ANNUAL TEST FAIL message.) To choose Quick,
press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system displays the message:
QUICK
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Annual Test Fail
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: ANNUAL TEST FAIL
ALARM DISABLED

7-22

7 In-Tank Setup

Periodic Test Fail

Annual Test Fail alarms when an annual leak test has not passed. You can enable or disable this alarm. To disable
the alarm, press STEP. (The system displays the PERIODIC TEST FAIL message.) To enable the alarm for the
selected tank, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ALARM ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Periodic Test Fail
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: PERIODIC TEST FAIL
ALARM DISABLED

The Periodic Test Fail feature allows you to disable or enable an alarm that triggers if a 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) leak test
fails. To disable the alarm, press STEP. (The system displays the GROSS TEST FAIL message.) To enable the
alarm for the selected tank, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ALARM ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Gross Test Fail
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: GROSS TEST FAIL
ALARM DISABLED

The Gross Test Fail feature allows you to disable or enable an alarm that triggers when a 3.0 gph (11.3 lph) leak
test fails. To disable the alarm, press STEP. (The system displays the ANN TEST AVERAGING message.) To
enable the alarm for the selected tank, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ALARM ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Annual Test Averaging
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (product Label)
ANN TEST AVERAGING: OFF

When on, Annual Test Averaging averages the last ten 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) in-tank leak tests. To leave the feature
off, press STEP. (The system displays the PER TEST AVERAGING message.) To turn on the feature, press
CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ANN TEST AVERAGING: ON
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

7-23

7 In-Tank Setup

Periodic Test Averaging

Periodic Test Averaging
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product label)
PER TEST AVERAGING: OFF

When on, Periodic Test Averaging activates averaging for the last five 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) in-tank leak tests. To leave
the feature off, press STEP. (The system displays the TANK TEST NOTIFY message.) To turn on the feature, press
CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
PER TEST AVERAGING: ON
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Tank Test Notify
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK TEST NOTIFY: OFF

When on, the Tank Test Notify feature triggers a warning, allowing the operator to set a relay to shut down the
submersible. To leave the feature off, press STEP. (The system displays the TNK TST SIPHON BREAK message.)
To turn on the feature, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
TANK TEST NOTIFY: ON
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Tank Test Siphon Break
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
TNK TST SIPHON BREAK: OFF

NOTE: This option requires that the siphon break valve be installed.
When on, Tank Test Siphon Break allows the operator to perform in-tank leak tests on siphon manifolded tanks. To
leave the feature off, press STEP. (The system displays the DELIVERY DELAY message.) To turn on the feature,
press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
TNK TST SIPHON BREAK: ON
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Stick Offset (International Option)
The Stick Offset display appears only if Stick Height Offset was enabled in System Setup (“Stick Height Offset International Option” on page 5-14). A Stick Offset can be entered for each tank so that the probe (product)

7-24

7 In-Tank Setup

HRM Reconciliation Warning Limit (International Option)

height “appears” to be equal to a stick gauge reading of the product height - This entry is for operator
convenience only, and as such it has no bearing on product volume calculations.
Press STEP to display the message:
T1: (Product Label)
STICK OFFSET: XXXX.XX

To determine the value to enter for Stick Offset, refer to the Tank's Tilt Worksheet (if completed), or record the
probe height reading and record a stick height reading from the tank. If the probe's fuel height reading is lower
than the stick reading, enter the positive difference between the two. If the probe's reading is higher than the stick
reading, enter the negative difference between the two. For example, if stick height = 52 and probe height = 48,
you enter +4; if stick height = 52 and probe height = 54, you enter -2.
Stick offsets can range from +144 to -144 inches. Press CHANGE, enter the desired offset, then press ENTER.

HRM Reconciliation Warning Limit (International Option)
The warning threshold for the Hourly Reconciliation Monitoring (HRM) feature can be set [to verify that HRM is
enabled, see Figure 4-2 on page 4-4]. This is the average reconciliation variance over a 24-hour period.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1:(Product Label)
RECON WARN LIMIT:000003

Press STEP to accept the default warning limit of 3 litres. Min. value is 1 litre and max. value is 400 litres.
To change the warning threshold press CHANGE and enter the desired threshold. Press ENTER to confirm the
entry.
The display will confirm your entry with the message:
T1: RECON WARN LIMIT:00000n
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

HRM Reconciliation Alarm Limit (international Option)
The alarm threshold for the Hourly Reconciliation Monitoring feature can be set. This is the average reconciliation
variance over a 24-hour period.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1:(Product Label)
RECON ALM LIMIT:000004

Press STEP to accept the default alarm limit of 4 litres. Min. value is 1 litre and max. value is 400 litres.
To change the alarm threshold press CHANGE and enter the desired threshold. Press ENTER to confirm the
entry.
The display will confirm your entry with the message:
T1:RECON ALM LIMIT:00000n
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

7-25

7 In-Tank Setup

Delivery Report Delay Time

Delivery Report Delay Time
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
DELIVERY DELAY: 01

Use this display to set a delay time between the completion of a bulk delivery and the Delivery Increase Report.
This feature prevents generation of false reports during the intervals between multi-compartment drops to one
tank. The feature also allows fuel to “settle out” after a delivery, which is especially important in manifolded tank
groups.
To enter a delay time for the selected tank, press CHANGE. Enter the delay time in minutes (up to 99). Press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
DELIVERY DELAY: XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Pump Threshold
This feature is for line manifolded tanks and is only enabled when you have the Dispense Mode set to Manifolded:
Sequential.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
PUMP THRESHOLD : 10.00

When the tank’s volume drops below the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over
immediately to the next available tank in the line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for
another 10 seconds to avoid a disruption in dispensing during the switch over. The allowable threshold can be
from 0 to 50 percent of the tank’s full volume (see “Full Volume” on page 7-6). The default value is 10 percent.

Setting Up Additional Tanks
If you have additional tanks to set up, press STEP to return to the ENTER PRODUCT LABEL message. Then
Press TANK/SENSOR to select another tank. Repeat the setup procedures for the new tank beginning with the
section above entitled “Product Labels” on page 7-2.
If you have entered setup information for all tanks, press FUNCTION to exit.

7-26

8

In-Tank Leak Tests

The In-Tank Leak Test Setup function allows you to establish and enter the method, timing, and duration of
automatic leak tests.
If you are using the In-Tank Leak Test feature for underground storage tank regulatory compliance, be sure the leak
test limits you establish and enter comply with the test type, accuracy, and frequency requirements as defined by
the regulatory authorities governing your site. In addition, set the in-tank leak test time for a period when no fueling
from or bulk delivery to the tank will occur. Such activity during an in-tank leak test will result in inaccurate test
results.
NOTE: In-Tank Leak tests may also be conducted, as needed, from the Operating mode.

Selecting the In-Tank Leak Test Setup Function
To select In-Tank Leak Test Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
IN-TANK LEAK TEST SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Method: All Tank/Single Tank
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
LEAK TEST METHOD
ALL TANK

You can choose to run In-Tank Leak Tests for all tanks simultaneously, using the same setup information, or you can
choose to set up and run leak tests for single tanks. If you choose Single Tank, you may run overlapping tests
simultaneously, even though you enter separate setup information for each tank.
NOTE: If you choose ALL TANK and plan to choose CSLD as the test frequency, then all tanks in the system must
be equipped with 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) magnetostrictive probes, and you must have the CSLD software module key
installed in this system. If you choose Single Tank, you must enter test setup information for each tank individually.
To run tests with the same setup information for all tanks, press STEP. The system displays the message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

To run tests with different setup information for each tank, press CHANGE in response to the LEAK TEST
METHOD message, so the system displays SINGLE TANK. Press ENTER and press STEP. The system now
displays:
TEST SINGLE TANK: TANK 1
ON DATE

Whether you choose ALL TANK or SINGLE TANK, the procedure for specifying setup information is almost
identical. The only difference is that the SINGLE TANK method requires you to specify multiple test setups, one for
each tank.

8-1

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

NOTE: The screen examples shown in this procedure assume that you have selected the ALL TANK method. If you
choose SINGLE TANK, the tank number (for example “TANK 1”) replaces the phrase “ALL TANK” on each screen.

Leak Test Frequency
As mentioned, when you select a leak test method—ALL TANK in this example—the system displays the message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

NOTE: If you are entering setup information using the SINGLE TANK method and have already set up the test for
Tank 1, press TANK to choose the tank number you want to set up.
Do not press ENTER after changing the tank number. You must choose the Test Frequency, as described below,
before pressing ENTER.
You may choose from among the following leak test frequency options:

• ON DATE
• ANNUALLY
• MONTHLY
• WEEKLY
• DAILY (QPLD will be selected if the Leak Test Frequency is set to daily, and the Leak Start Time is disabled.
This feature is only available if HRM has been enabled [see Figure 4-2 on page 4-4]).

• AUTOMATIC (requires that the tank be assigned to a Line Leak Detector [see “Tank Selection” on page 10-7 for
PLLD, “Tank Selection” on page 11-6 for WPLLD, or “Pipe Label and Tank Identification” on page 12-1 for
VLLD], or a Pump Sense input - see Chapter 15)

• CSLD (runs leak tests automatically during idle tank times and stores data for leak test reports)
NOTE: The CSLD option appears only when the tank is equipped with a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Mag probe, and the
system has the CSLD software module key installed.

TEST ON DATE
To run the test on a specific date, press STEP in response to the ON DATE message. (To run the test using other
frequency options, follow the procedures described in the appropriate section below.) The system displays the
message:
TEST ON DATES: ALL TANKS
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX

Press CHANGE, and enter the date on which you want the tests to run. Enter the date in the format MM/DD/
YYYY. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 8-7.

8-2

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

ANNUAL TEST
To run the tests annually, press CHANGE and press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
ANNUALLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue setting the annual test. The system displays the message:
TEST ANNUALLY: ALL TANKS
JAN WEEK 1 MON

To set the date of the annual test, press CHANGE until the month during which you want to perform the test
appears, and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the week during which you want to perform the test
appears and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test
appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
MONTH WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

For example, if you chose to run the tests on the Friday of the first week of June, the system would display the
message:
JUNE WEEK 1 FRI
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 8-7.

MONTHLY TEST
To run the tests monthly, press CHANGE twice, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
MONTHLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
TEST MONTHLY: ALL TANKS
WEEK 1 MON

To set the date of the monthly test, press CHANGE until the week during which you want to perform the test
appears and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test
appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

8-3

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 8-7.

WEEKLY TEST
To run the tests weekly, press CHANGE three times, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
WEEKLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
TEST WEEKLY: ALL TANKS
MON

To set the date of the weekly test, press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test appears.
Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 8-7.

DAILY TEST
To run the tests daily, press CHANGE four times, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
TEST ALL TANKS:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
DAILY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 8-7.

AUTOMATIC TEST
NOTE: This option is available only if Line Leak Detector or Pump Sense is installed, configured and assigned to
the tank, or if External Input Type is configured as Pump Sense and assigned to the tank. (See section entitled
“External Input Type” on page 23-2.)
To run the tests automatically when Line Leak Detector or Pump Sense is installed, press CHANGE five times in
response to the ON DATE message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

8-4

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

Press ENTER to confirm your choice:
AUTOMATIC
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If you are setting up the test for All Tanks, the setup is complete. Press FUNCTION to exit.
If you are setting up the test for Single Tanks, the setup is complete for the tank you are setting up. Press STEP
and press TANK to choose the next tank. Return to the beginning of the section “Leak Test Frequency” on page 82 and repeat the procedure for the next tank.

CSLD - OPTION
NOTE: The CSLD option appears only when the tank is equipped with a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Mag probe, and the
system has the CSLD software module key installed.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TEST ALL TANK:
ON DATE

To run the test using the CSLD frequency option, press CHANGE repeatedly until you see CSLD on the display.
Press ENTER to confirm your choice:
CSLD
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
CSLD Pd: ALL TANKS
Pd = 95%

You can set the Pd (Probability of Detection) to 95% or 99%. To accept the 95% value, press STEP. (The system
displays the CLIMATE FACTOR message.) If “Custom” appears in this field, a special value has been entered
remotely. Do not change the selection from Custom. This selection is used primarily for European operations.
To change the value to 99%, press CHANGE, then press ENTER to confirm your choice:
Pd = 99%
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
CLIMATE FACTOR: ALL TANKS
MODERATE

The default is Moderate and the other choice is Extreme.
Climate Factor - set to Moderate
Press STEP to display the message:
TEST ALL TANKS
CSLD

If you are setting up the CSLD test frequency for All Tanks, the setup is complete. Press FUNCTION to exit.

8-5

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

If you are setting up the CSLD test frequency for a Single Tank, the setup is complete for the tank you are setting
up. Press TANK to choose the next tank. Return to the beginning of the “CSLD - Option” on page 8-5 and repeat
the procedure for the next tank.
Climate Factor - set to Extreme
To choose Extreme, press CHANGE, then press ENTER to confirm your choice:
EXTREME
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

The following message displays:
EVAP COMP: ALL TANK
EVAP COMP: NO

If you are setting up the CSLD test frequency for All Tanks, the setup is complete. Press FUNCTION to exit. If you
are setting up the CSLD test frequency for a Single Tank, the setup is complete for the tank you are setting up.
Press TANK to choose the next tank. Return to the beginning of the “CSLD - Option” on page 8-5 and repeat the
procedure for the next tank.
Changing Evaporation Compensation to YES should only be used on individual tanks which have exhibited
evidence of consistent, extreme vapor loss due to fuel evaporation, and which interferes with normal CSLD leak
detection monitoring causing false leak alarms.
If you want to activate CSLD evaporation compensation for a single tank, press CHANGE. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice. The following message displays:
STAGE II VAPOR: TANK X
STAGE II VAPOR: YES

The default for Stage II Vapor is YES. To select No, press CHANGE and ENTER.
Next you must enter CSLD Evaporation Constants for the months of the year. Press FUNCTION until you see the
message:
SYSTEM SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
CSLD EVAP CONSTANTS
PRESS 

Press ENTER and the Reid Vapor Pressure entry for January displays:
REID VAPOR PRESSURE
JAN: 00.0

You will need to enter a Reid Vapor Pressure (RVP) value for at least 1 month of the year. The RVP monthly values
for your geographical area can be obtained from your local Petroleum Distributor. The range of valid RVP entries is
0 to 15. The default value is 00.0.
Press CHANGE, enter the Reid Vapor Pressure for January, then press ENTER. If you are entering RVPs for
selected months, Press STEP to display the month(s) for which you want to enter RVP values. For each month,
Press CHANGE, enter the value, then press ENTER to confirm your choice. When you have finished entering the
RVP values, press FUNCTION until you return to In-Tank Leak Test Setup.

8-6

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Gross Test Auto-Confirm

Gross Test Auto-Confirm
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
GROSS TEST: ALL TANK
AUTO-CONFIRM: DISABLED

Note: this message only displays if you have selected CSLD as the test frequency and the tank is assigned to a
pump sensing device (any LLD, pump sense, I/O).
If you are experiencing tank gross test alarms that are proven to be false, enabling this feature may reduce these
false alarms. When enabled, two test fails in a row will be required before a Fail is posted. However, when enabled
this feature will also increase the time needed to detect a gross leak by one 30-45 minute idle period.
To leave this feature disabled, press STEP to continue, or press CHANGE, then ENTER and the message
displays:
GROSS TEST: ALL TANK
AUTO-CONFIRM: ENABLED

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Start Time
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
START TIME: ALL TANK
TIME: DISABLED

You can enable the test by entering a start time or leave the test disabled.
To leave the test disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the TEST RATE message.)
To enter a start time, press CHANGE in response to the START TIME message. Enter the start time and press the
Right Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Rate
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TEST RATE: ALL TANK
0.10 GAL/HR

You can set the leak test rate at 0.2 gph or 0.1 gph (0.76 lph or 0.38 lph). The default test rate is 0.2 gph. The
system prints a leak report at the completion of the test.
NOTE: The 0.1 gph option appears only when a 0.1 gph Mag probe is installed.
To accept the default rate of 0.2 gph, press STEP. (The system displays the TEST DURATION message.)

8-7

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

Leak Test Duration

To set the test rate to 0.1 gph (0.38 lph), press CHANGE, then press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system
displays the following message:
TEST RATE: 0.10 GAL/HR
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Duration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the following message:
TEST DURATION: ALL TANK
DURATION: 02

To accept the displayed duration, press STEP. To set another test duration, press CHANGE. The maximum
duration is 6 hours. We recommend a minimum duration of two hours for 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) tests and three hours
for 0.1 gph tests.
Note: If you have Leak Test Early Stop enabled and the console determines that an in-tank leak test has passed
after the first two hours of the test, the test is completed, even though you had entered a Leak Test Duration of
more than 2 hours.
Enter the test duration in hours and press ENTER to confirm your choice:
DURATION: XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Early Stop
If necessary, press STEP until you see the following message:
TST EARLY STOP: ALL TANKS
DISABLED

Disabled is the default setting. When enabled this feature will prevent an In-Tank Leak Test from starting under the
following conditions:
1. Fuel level is less than Leak Min Periodic (0.2 gph test rate) or Leak Min Annual (0.1 gph test rate).
2. It is less than 8 hours from a delivery.
3. The product temperature is less than 0°F (-17.6°C) or more than +100°F (+37.4°C).
4. The fuel level is too low.
To accept the disabled condition, press STEP. To enable Leak Test Early Stop, press CHANGE and then ENTER
and the system displays:
TST EARLY STOP: ALL TANKS
ENABLED

Press STEP to continue.

8-8

8 In-Tank Leak Tests

CSLD Report Only

CSLD Report Only
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
REPORT ONLY: ALL TANK
DISABLED

Note: this message only displays if you have selected CSLD as the test frequency.
When enabled this feature inhibits the ‘No CSLD Idle Time’ and ‘CSLD Incr Rate’ alarms, and only prints CSLD
status reports at one of the times selected below:

• End of Month (at 8:00 a.m.),
• Day 15 and End of Month (both at 8:00 a.m.), or
• Day 25 and End of Month (both at 8:00 a.m.)
Press STEP to leave this feature disabled. Press CHANGE until the desired report print time(s) is displayed and
then press ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Report Format
The leak test report format can be set to Normal or Enhanced (select Enhanced to comply with the California Code
of Regulations). The enhanced report will have height, water, temperature, percent volume, rate and threshold
values in addition to the normal report format.
If necessary press STEP until you see the following message:
LEAK TEST REPORT FORMAT
NORMAL

To accept the displayed format, press STEP. To select the enhanced test format press CHANGE to toggle to
enhanced, then press ENTER to confirm. Press STEP to continue.

Setting Up Additional Tanks
If you are setting up the test for Single Tanks, the setup is complete for the selected tank. To set up additional
tanks, press STEP to return to the TEST SINGLE TANK message:
TEST SINGLE TANK: TANK 1
ON DATE

Then press TANK to choose the next tank. Repeat the setup procedures described above, beginning with the
section titled “Leak Test Frequency” on page 8-2. If you are setting up the test for All Tanks, or have completed
setting up all individual tanks, the setup is complete. Press FUNCTION to exit.

8-9

9

Fuel Management

The Fuel Management Setup function lets you estimate the number of days remaining before the tank reaches the
programmed low product level. The Low Product alarm activates when the amount of fuel falls below the Low
Product Limit set during In-Tank Setup (see “Low Product” on page 7-16 for information on how to set this value.)
This function also keeps track of each product’s average daily sales, which you can display or print. The starting
inventory minus ending inventory, plus deliveries determine the sales for each day of the week. Using this data, the
system calculates the estimated number of days of product remaining.
NOTE: The system assumes tanks with the same product code contain the same product. All information
displayed is for products, not tanks. The product name is the product label of the lowest tank number containing
the product (see “Product Labels” on page 7-2 and “Product Code” on page 7-2).

Selecting the Fuel Management Function
To select Fuel Management Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
FUEL MANAGEMENT SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP until you see the setup screen that you want.

Delivery Warning Days
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
FUEL MANAGEMENT SETUP
DELIVERY WARN DAYS: ##.#

You can set a threshold number of days of fuel remaining. When any product falls below this threshold, the system
posts a Delivery Needed warning for the product.
To set the threshold number of days of fuel remaining, press CHANGE in response to the DELIVERY WARN
DAYS message. Enter the threshold number of days of fuel remaining. This number can be up to 99.9 days. Enter
0 if you want to disable the warning. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
DELIVERY WARN DAYS: XX.X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Daily Time to Print Fuel Management Report
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
FUEL MGT AUTO PRINT
TIME: 12:00 AM PM

This display lets you set a daily time when the system will automatically print a fuel management report. The report
printed is a “Short Report” (see the system Operator’s Manual).

9-1

9 Fuel Management

Average Daily Sales

To set a daily time to print the report, press CHANGE in response to the FUEL MGT AUTO PRINT message.
Enter the time that you want the report to print each day or press CHANGE to disable. Press the Right or Left
Arrow keys to choose AM or PM. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
TIME: XX:XX AM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Average Daily Sales
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
REGULAR UNLEADED
AVG SALES SUN:
983

Use this display to enter the average daily sales for the selected product. If needed, press TANK to display and
select another product for which to set the average daily sales.
To set the average sales for Sundays, press CHANGE. Enter the average Sunday sales for the product selected.
Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
AVG SALES-SUN
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the AVG SALES message for Mondays:
REGULAR UNLEADED
AVG SALES MON:
983

Press CHANGE, enter the average daily sales for the selected day and product, and press ENTER. Press STEP.
Repeat the procedures just described until you have entered an average daily sales for each day of the week.
When you are finished entering the average sales for that product, press TANK to choose another product and
enter the average daily sales for it. Repeat the procedure until you have entered the average daily sales for each
product.
NOTE: Whenever the AVG SALES message appears, you may press TANK to select a different product or press
STEP to select a different day of the week.
When you have entered the average daily sales for each product, press FUNCTION to exit.

9-2

10

Pressurized Line Leak Detection

This function allows you to enter information about Pressurized Line Leak Detectors (PLLD) installed on product
pipelines in the system. You must enter data individually for each PLLD.

Line Manifolding Implications for AccuChart
For PLLD installations with line manifolded tanks, the master tank’s check valve’s relief pressure must be below the
pump’s operating pressure. AccuChart will run when there is line manifolding with PLLD line leak detection;
however, you should disable AccuChart if the results are poor. Also leaky valves will degrade AccuChart
performance. To disable AccuChart, select ‘Never’ at the Calibration Update step (In-Tank Setup, page 7-12).

PLLD Setup
Press FUNCTION until you see the message:
PRESSURE LINE LEAK SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Activating PLLDs
This display allows you to activate up to six PLLDs. In the active state, PLLD attempts to conduct line leak tests
whenever the dispensers are off.
LINE CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X X

To activate a PLLD, you replace the X with a number by pressing the CHANGE key. To leave a PLLD inactive,
leave an X in its position. You move between PLLDs 1 through 6 by pressing the right or left arrow key.
Press ENTER to confirm your choices (in this example you activate all six). The system displays:
SLOT #: 1 2 3 4 5 6
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Labeling PLLDs
This display allows you to label the line being monitored by a particular PLLD (location, fuel type, etc.).
PRESSURE LINE LABEL
Q1:

If necessary, press TANK/ SENSOR to select the desired PLLD in the system.

10-1

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Piping Type

When the appropriate PLLD appears in the display, press CHANGE. (To erase a label press CHANGE again.)
Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the line label and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with
the message:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Piping Type
This display allows you to select the type of line being used:
• 2.0 IN. (50 mm) STEEL

•

2.0/3.0 IN. (50/76 mm) FIBERGLASS

• 1.5 (38 mm) IN. ENVIRN GFLEXII

• ENVIROFLEX PP1501

•

ENVIROFLEX PP1500

• WFG COFLX2000 RIBBED

• OMNIFLEX CP1501

•

1.5/2 IN. ENVIRON GFLXD

• ENVROFLX PP1503/2503

• ENVROFLX PP1502/2502

•

OPW PISCES SP15

• OMNIFLEX CP1503

• OPW PISCES CP15

•

APT P175SC

• OPW PISCES CP15DW

• OPW PISCES CP20

•

USER DEFINED*

• PETROTECHNIK UPP EXTRA 63 MM

• OPW PISCES SP20

* To select ‘User Defined’, you must know the Bulk Modulus of the pipe type.
IMPORTANT! To ensure accurate line monitoring, you must enter the piping type that is installed for this line. The
default is Enviroflex PP1501.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
TYP: ENVIROFLEX PP1501

Press CHANGE, enter the correct pipe type, press ENTER to confirm your choice and continue.

Piping Length
This display allows you to enter the total length of piping run between the tank and the dispensers. For manifolded
tanks, include the length of piping between the manifolded tank’s check valve and where it connects into the
product line.
NOTE: Refer to the Veeder-Root Line Leak Application Guide (Part No. 577013-465) for approved minimum and
maximum piping lengths.
IMPORTANT! The default line length must be changed to reflect the actual line length or a Setup Data Warning
will occur.
Press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
LINE LENGTH: XXX

Press CHANGE, enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot or meter). Press ENTER to confirm your
choice and press STEP to continue.

10-2

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

User Defined Pipe Type - Setup Parameters

ENTERING LINE LENGTH FOR DUAL SIZE FLEXIBLE PIPE TYPES
If you are using Enviroflex PP1502/2502, Enviroflex PP1502/2503, or 1.5/2 IN Envirn Gflxd, your line length setup
will first display the 1.5 inch size:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
1.5 IN DIAM. LEN: 501

Press CHANGE and enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot). Press ENTER to confirm your
choice and the line length setup for the 2.5 inch size appears:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
LINE LENGTH: 301

Press CHANGE and enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot). Press ENTER to confirm your
choice and press STEP to continue.

ENTERING LINE LENGTH FOR 2.0/3.0 IN. FIBERGLASS PIPE TYPE
If you are using fiberglass, your line length setup will first display the 2.0 inch (50 mm) size:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
2.0 IN DIAM. LEN: 501

Enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot) and press ENTER. If you are not using 2-inch fiberglass,
enter 0 and press ENTER. The display shows the 3-inch (76 mm) size:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
3.0 IN DIAM. LEN: 351

If you are not using 3-inch line, enter 0 and press ENTER. If you are using 3-inch line, enter the length and press
ENTER.
IMPORTANT! When using the Fiberglass pipe type, the unused size’s length must be set to zero.
Press STEP to continue.

User Defined Pipe Type - Setup Parameters
If you selected User Defined as the pipe type, your 1st line length setup will display (If the line consists of one pipe
type, one diameter, ignore the second line length entry. If the line is constructed of two connected lengths of the
same pipe type but with different diameters, or of two connected lengths of different pipe types with the same or
different diameters, then enter the required second line’s data.):
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
1ST LINE LENGTH: 501

Press CHANGE, enter the first line length (rounded up to the next foot) then press ENTER to confirm your choice.
Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
2ND LINE LENGTH: 0

10-3

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Thermal Coefficient

Press CHANGE, enter the second line length, if necessary, (rounded up to the next foot) then press ENTER to
confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
1ST LINE DIAMETER: 0.00

Press CHANGE, enter the first line’s diameter then press ENTER to confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
2ND LINE DIAMETER: 0.00

Press CHANGE, enter the second line’s diameter (displays only if second line’s length >0) then press ENTER to
confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
1ST BULK MODULUS: 0

Press CHANGE, enter the bulk modulus of the first line then press ENTER to confirm your choice. Press STEP to
continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
2ND BULK MODULUS: 0

Press CHANGE, enter the second line’s bulk modulus (displays only if second line’s length >0) then press ENTER
to confirm your choice. Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
THERMAL COEFF: 0.00070

Press CHANGE, enter the thermal coefficient for the product in the line then press ENTER to confirm your choice
(see “Coefficient of Thermal Expansion” on page 7-3). Press STEP to continue.

Thermal Coefficient
If you selected APT P175SC, PETROTECHNIK UPP EXTRA 63 MM, or OPW PISCES SP20 as the pipe type, you
must enter the product’s thermal coefficient after entering the pipe’s length.
Press STEP to continue.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
THERMAL COEFF: 0.00070

Press CHANGE, enter the thermal coefficient for the product in the line then press ENTER to confirm your choice
(see “Coefficient of Thermal Expansion” on page 7-3). Press STEP to continue.

0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling
NOTE: The 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test is an optional feature. This message will not appear unless the 0.20
Repetitive PLLD software module key is installed in your system:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
0.20 GPH TEST: DISABLED

This feature allows the user to choose the frequency of the 0.2 gph (0.76 lph) tests1:

10-4

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling

• Disabled - No manual or automatic 0.2 gph testing is allowed.
• Repetitive - After a dispense, a 3.0 gph (11.3 lph) test is run, followed by a 0.2 gph test. The test blockout
period (selected in Precision Test Duration setup) is then observed. Following the test blockout period, the test
sequence repeats after the next dispense. This selection also enables manual 0.2 gph testing.

• Monthly - At the beginning of every month until a test has passed. This selection also enables manual 0.2 gph
testing.

• Manual - 0.2 gph tests run only when manually started.
Disabled is the default setting. Press STEP for Disabled, or press CHANGE to select other choices, then press
ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling
NOTE: The 0.1 gph Line Leak Test is an optional feature. This message will not appear unless the 0.10 Repetitive
PLLD or 0.10 On Demand PLLD software module key is installed in your system.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
0.10 GPH TEST: DISABLED

This feature allows the user to choose the scheduling frequency of the 0.1 gph tests1:

• Disabled (default) - No manual or automatic 0.1 gph testing is allowed.
• Repetitive -After a dispense, a 3.0 gph test is run, a 0.2 gph test is run, followed by the 0.1 gph test. The test
blockout period (selected in Precision Test Duration setup) is then observed. Following the test blockout period,
the test sequence repeats after the next dispense. This selection also enables manual 0.1 gph testing. (Note:
The Repetitive option is not available when the 0.1 On Demand PLLD software module key is installed.)

• Auto - 6 months after the last passed 0.1 gph test. Also enables manual 0.1 gph testing.
• Manual - 0.1 gph tests run only when manually started.
Press STEP for Disabled, or press CHANGE to select other choices, then press ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

Passive 0.1 gph Line Leak Testing
If pipe type selection was either User-Defined or APT P175SC, and the 0.1 gph line leak test scheduling selection
was Auto, the following message will appear:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
PASSIVE 0.10 GPH: NO

Use this option if the user desires the most current passing results for 0.1 testing without increasing exposure to
false alarms.
This option does not interfere with the 6-month automatically scheduled 0.1 gph test.

1. When CSLD is available, all 0.2 gph and 0.1 gph line leak testing is subject to test blockout periods. These blockouts are imposed to allow
CSLD ‘pump off’ time to collect tank leak test data. Precision tests are run on an every other day basis. In addition, if the last precision test
result is a pass, there will be a minimum of 60 hours before the next test will be attempted. If necessary, the 60-hour blockout period can be
extended in the Precision Test Duration setup [page 5-15].

10-5

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Shutdown Rate

If the Passive 0.1 testing option is selected the system will continue monitoring the line pressure after it has
completed a passing 0.2 test. The test is labeled passive because it will not turn on the pump. If the line pressure
remains stable it will satisfy the requirements for a passing 0.1 test. The passed test will be recorded.This method
cannot identify a leaking line because the line has to be repressurized several times to distinguish a leak from
thermals.
No is the default setting. Press STEP for No, or press CHANGE to select Yes, then press ENTER.
Press STEP to continue.

Shutdown Rate
This feature lets you shut down the line following a failed line leak test. The choices are 3.0 gph, 0.2 gph, 0.1 gph,
or none.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
SHUTDOWN RATE: 3.0 GPH

Note: you must have the Precision PLLD software module key installed in your system to select shutdown rates
of 0.2 gph or 0.1 gph.
Press STEP to accept the 3.0 gph (11.3 lph) shutdown rate, or press CHANGE until the desired shutdown rate
appears, then ENTER to confirm your choice. NOTE: If you select a 0.1 gph (0.38 lph) shutdown rate, a failed 0.1
gph, 0.2 gph (0.76 lph), or 3.0 gph leak test will disable dispensing. If you select a shutdown rate of 3.0 gph, then
only a failed 3.0 gph leak test will disable dispensing, while a failed 0.2 gph or 0.1 gph leak test will just trigger an
alarm. If you select None, no failed test will shut down the line.
Press STEP to continue.

Low Pressure Alarm Shutoff
The Low Pressure Alarm Shutoff detects low pressure during a dispense. The Default value is 0 psi (0 kPa), with
programmable values from 0 - 25 psi (0 - 7 kPa). When the pressure drops below the entered shutoff value, the
pump shuts off. The next handle up will restart the pump. A value of 0 will disable this alarm.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
LOW PRESSURE SHUTOFF: NO

For no low pressure shutoff, press STEP. To enter a different Low Pressure Shutoff value, press CHANGE, then
ENTER. Press STEP and enter the desired pressure. Press ENTER, the system confirms your choice with the
message:
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
LOW PRESSURE: 5

10-6

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Tank Selection

Tank Selection
This message appears only if tanks have been configured in the In-Tank Setup procedure.
Q1: (Pressure Line Label)
NONE

For no selection press STEP to continue. To enter the number of the tank in which the pump the plld is controlling
is installed, press CHANGE, select the tank number, then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the
message:
T#: (Pressure Line Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Selecting a Dispense Mode
NOTE: This option will only appear if a tank has been selected for the PLLD.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: ENTER DISPENSE MODE
XXXXXXXXX

This entry asks you to select the dispense mode. You can select between:

• STANDARD - Only one pump feeds the line.
• MANIFOLDED: ALTERNATE1 - The pump will run in the tank with the greatest inventory volume.
• MANIFOLDED: SEQUENTIAL1 - The tanks are pumped low one at a time. When the tank’s volume drops
below the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over immediately to the next available tank
in the line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for another 10 seconds to avoid a
disruption in dispensing during the switch over. (see “Pump Threshold” on page 7-26).

• MANIFOLDED: ALL PUMPS - All pumps on the line are run.
Press CHANGE until your choice appears, then press ENTER to continue.

Pressure Transducer Type
There are 3 different PLLD transducer types. Each type can be identified as follows: Non-Vented (transducer has
an aluminum top); Vented (transducer has an aluminum top with a slotted vent screw); and High Pressure
(transducer has a plastic top with a metal nameplate [this type is currently being shipped]).

1. To prevent backfilling, the level of all tanks connected to the line will be monitored. If the level of any tank exceeds 95% of the Max
or Label Volume limit (see “Max or Label Vol” on page 7-15), the pump for that tank will also be turned on during dispensing. The
state of the pump that was already ON will not be changed.

10-7

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Pressure Offset

If you have any one of the three PLLD transducer types, and the line does not have a high pressure pump, you may
use the Non-vented (default) selection for this step. If you have a high pressure pump in the line, you must use a
high pressure transducer and select High Pressure in this step.
Q1:
SENSOR: NON-VENTED

Press CHANGE until your choice appears, then press ENTER to continue.

Pressure Offset
New transducers are now factory sealed and their internal chamber cannot be equalized to atmospheric pressure
by opening a vent screw as in the past. The Pressure Offset test procedure described in this section must be
performed when using new PLLD transducers with serial numbers of 100,000 or above, in sites located at
altitudes above 2,000 feet (609 m). Note: this procedure can also be used with transducers having serial numbers
below 100,000 instead of using the vent screw to equalize pressure.
Table 10-1 illustrates approximate absolute pressures that are for reference only. The transducer’s actual reading
may vary slightly due to its construction, A/D conversion, head pressure in the lines, etc.
Before this procedure is performed, the pressure in the line MUST be vented to zero. It is recommended that this
procedure be performed immediately after installing the transducer, before energizing the STP.
Table 10-1.- Reference of Absolute Pressure Offsets at Various Altitudes
Altitude
ft (m)

Atmospheric Pressure Offset
psi (kPa)

Sea level - 2000 (609)

No Change

2000 - 3000 (609 - 914)

+1 (+6.9)

3000 - 4000 (914 - 1219)

+1.5 (+10.3)

4000 - 5000 (1219 - 1524)

+2.0 (+13.8)

5000 - 6000 (1524 - 1829)

+2.5 (+17.2)

6000 - 7000 (1829 - 2134)

+3.0 (+20.7)

7000 - 8000 (2134 - 2438)

+3.4 (+23.4)

8000 - 9000 (2438 - 2743)

+3.8 (+26.2)

9000 - 10,000 (2743 - 3048)

+4.2 (+28.9)

10,000 - 12,000 (3048 - 3658)

+4.6 (+31.7)

12,000 - 14,000 (3658 - 4267)

+5.4 (+37.2)

14,000 (4267) - above

+5.7 (+39.3)

The first step is to vent the line(s). The second step is to go to the Diagnostic Mode and run a Pressure Offset Test
for each transducer to determine its Pressure Offset value. The third step is to return to the Setup Mode and enter
the Pressure Offset determined in the tests, for each transducer.
OFF

VENTING THE LINE
1. Turn Off, lock out, tag power to the STP.

10-8

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Pressure Offset

2. Vent the line to zero.
3. Reseal the line.
4. Turn On power to the STP. Follow the procedure below.

DETERMINING A PRESSURE OFFSET VALUE FOR EACH TRANSDUCER
Press MODE to display DIAGNOSTIC MODE, then FUNCTION until you see the message:
PRESSURE LINE LEAK DIAG
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

From the PLLD Diag message, press STEP until you see the display below
Q 1: PLLD NUMBER 1
P OFFSET TEST 

Press ENTER and the results of the last test displays (‘No Test Data Available’ message appears if this is the first
test):
Q 1: PRESS OFFSET TST PSI
9-30-99 03:10AM +3.2

Press STEP:
Q 1: START P OFFSET TEST
PRESS 

To start the test, press ENTER. During the test this message appears:
Q 1: PRESSURE OFFSET TEST
MEASURING

The Pressure Offset test results message appears when the test ends:
Q 1: PRESSURE OFFSET TEST
DONE - OFFSET: +XX.X PSI

You can print out the test result if you have an optional printer. If you do not have a printer, record the offset value
for the transducer. Press Tank/Sensor and repeat the above procedure for all installed transducers.
The maximum offset pressure range is ±5 psi (±34.5 kPa). If a Pressure Offset is greater than ±5 psi (±34.5 kPa),
repeat the test. If the Pressure Offset is again out of range, either the line pressure is not completely vented or
there is a hardware problem. Refer to PLLD troubleshooting procedures for further instructions.

ENTERING THE PRESSURE OFFSET VALUE FOR EACH TRANSDUCER
Press MODE to return to the SETUP MODE, then FUNCTION until you see the message:
PRESSURE LINE LEAK SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

10-9

10 Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Mechanical Blenders

Press STEP until you see the message:
Q 1: PLLD NUMBER 1
PRESSURE OFFSET: +XX.X

Press CHANGE and enter the Pressure Offset value for transducer Q1. If necessary, press the left arrow key to
change the sign (+ or -). Note: enter the Offset value exactly as displayed in the Offset test result message
(including + or - sign). Press TANK/SENSOR, to display another transducer. Press CHANGE to enter its Pressure
Offset value, then ENTER to confirm the change. Repeat this procedure until you have entered Offsets for all
transducers.

Mechanical Blenders
When a site has mechanical blenders, the lines can be assigned to a blend set. This change affects the scheduling
of precision line testing, 0.2 and 0.1.
Press STEP until you see the message:
Q 1: PLLD NUMBER 1
MECHANICAL BLENDER: NO

Press CHANGE:
Q 1: PLLD NUMBER 1
MECHANICAL BLENDER: YES

Press ENTER.
Before proceeding to Blend Partners, enable Mechanical Blender for all lines:
Q 1: BLEND PARTNERS
Q#: 00, 00

Press CHANGE:
Q 1: BLEND PARTNERS
Q#: 02, 03

Press ENTER.

Setting Up Additional PLLDs
If you have additional PLLDs to set up, press STEP to return to the PRESSURE LINE LABEL message:
PRESSURE LINE LABEL
Q1:

Press TANK to access another PLLD. Repeat the steps described above, beginning with “Labeling PLLDs” on
page 10-1. After you have entered setup information for all PLLDs in the system, press FUNCTION to exit.

10-10

11

Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

This function allows you to enter information about Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detectors (WPLLD) installed
on product pipelines in the system. You must enter data individually for each WPLLD.

Line Manifolding Implications for AccuChart
For WPLLD installations with line manifolded tanks, the master tank’s check valve’s relief pressure must be below
the pump’s operating pressure. AccuChart will run when there is line manifolding with WPLLD line leak detection;
however, you should disable AccuChart if the results are poor. Also leaky valves will degrade AccuChart
performance. To disable AccuChart, select ‘Never’ at the Calibration Update step (In-Tank Setup, page 7-12).

WPLLD Setup
Press FUNCTION until you see the message:
WPLLD LINE LEAK SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Activating WPLLDs
This display allows you to activate up to a maximum of 9 WPLLDs. In the active state, a WPLLD attempts to
conduct line leak tests whenever the dispensers are off:
LINE CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X

To activate a WPLLD, you replace the X with a number by pressing the CHANGE key. To leave a WPLLD inactive,
leave an X in its position. You move between WPLLDs 1 through 3 by pressing the right or left arrow key.
Press ENTER to confirm your choices (in this example you activate the first three). The system displays:
SLOT #: 1 2 3
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If more than three WPLLDs are installed, pressing STEP will display the second module. Make any required
activations as described above, press ENTER then STEP (repeat if necessary).:
LINE CONFIG - MODULE 2
SLOT # - X X X

Press STEP to continue.

11-1

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Labeling WPLLDs

Labeling WPLLDs
This display allows you to identify the line being monitored by a particular WPLLD (location, fuel type, etc.).
WPLLD LINE LABEL
W1:

If necessary, press TANK/ SENSOR to select the desired WPLLD in the system.
When the appropriate WPLLD appears in the display, press CHANGE. (To erase a label press CHANGE again.)
Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the line label and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with
the message:
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Piping Type
This display allows you to select the type of line being used:
• 2.0-IN. (50 mm) STEEL
• ENVIROFLEX

PP15011

• OMNIFLEX CP15011
13.0

• 2.0/3.0 IN. (50/76 mm) FIBERGLASS
• ENVIROFLEX PP15001
• 1.5 IN. (38 mm) ENVIRON GEOFLX D1

gph (11.3 lph) leak tests only on these piping types.

NOTE: to ensure correct line monitoring, you must enter the piping type that is installed for this line. The default is
Enviroflex PP1501.
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
TYP: ENVIROFLEX PP1501

Press CHANGE, enter the correct pipe type, press ENTER to confirm your choice and continue.

Piping Length
This display allows you to enter the total length of piping run between the tank and the dispensers. For manifolded
tanks, include the length of piping between the manifolded tank’s check valve and where it connects into the
product line. The allowable length in feet for each of the line types are: steel 30 to 500 ft (10 to 151 m), all others
10 to 500 (3 to 151 m)- except 3 inch (76 mm) fiberglass which is 10 to 220 (3 to 67 m).
IMPORTANT! The default length must be changed to reflect the actual line length or a Setup Data Warning will
occur.
NOTE: Refer to the Veeder-Root Line Leak Application Guide (Part No. 577013-465) for approved minimum and
maximum piping lengths.
Press STEP until you see the message:
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
LINE LENGTH: XXX

11-2

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option

Press CHANGE and enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot). Press ENTER to confirm your
choice, and continue.
If you are using fiberglass, your line length setup will first display the 2.0 inch (50 mm) size:
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
2.0 iN DIAM. LEN: 501

Enter the actual line length (rounded up to the next foot) and press ENTER. If you are not using 2.0 inch fiberglass
enter 0 and press ENTER. The display shows the 3.0 (76 mm) size:
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
3.0 iN DIAM. LEN: 351

If you are not using 3.0 inch line, enter 0 and press ENTER. If you are using 3.0 inch line, enter the length and
press ENTER.
NOTE: When using the Fiberglass pipe type, the unused size’s length must be set to zero.
Press STEP to continue.

0.2 gph (0.76 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option
NOTE: The 0.2 gph Line Leak Test is an optional feature for steel and fiberglass piping types only. This message
will not appear unless the 0.20 Repetitive WPLLD software module key is installed in your system.
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
0.20 GPH TEST: DISABLED

This feature allows the user to choose the scheduling frequency of the 0.2 gph tests1:

• Disabled - No manual or automatic 0.2 gph testing is allowed.
• Repetitive - After a dispense, a 3.0 gph (11.3 lph) test is run, followed by a 0.2 gph test. The test blockout
period (selected in Precision Test Duration setup) is then observed. After the test blockout period, the test
sequence repeats after the next dispense. This selection also enables manual 0.2 gph testing.

• Monthly - At the beginning of every month until a test has passed. This selection also enables manual 0.2 gph
testing.

• Manual - 0.2 gph tests run only when manually started.
Disabled is the default setting. Press STEP for Disabled, or press CHANGE to select other choices, then press
ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

1. When CSLD is available, all 0.2 gph and 0.1 gph line leak testing is subject to test blockout periods. These
blockouts are imposed to allow CSLD ‘pump off’ time to collect tank leak test data. Precision tests are run on an
every other day basis. In addition, if the last precision test result is a pass, there will be a minimum of 60 hours
before the next test will be attempted. If necessary, the 60 hour blockout period can be extended in the Precision
Test Duration setup [page 5-15].

11-3

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option

0.1 gph (0.38 lph) Line Leak Test Scheduling - Option
NOTE: The 0.1 gph Line Leak Test is an optional feature for steel and fiberglass piping types only. This message
will not appear unless the 0.10 On Demand WPLLD software module key is installed in your system.
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
0.10 GPH TEST: DISABLED

This feature allows the user to choose the scheduling frequency of the 0.1 gph tests (See footnote 1 preceding
page):

• Disabled - No manual or automatic 0.1 gph testing is allowed.
• Auto - 6 months after the last passed 0.1 gph test. Also enables manual 0.1 gph testing.
• Manual - 0.1 gph tests run only when manually started.
Disabled is the default setting. Press STEP for Disabled, or press CHANGE to select other choices, then press
ENTER. Press STEP to continue.

Shutdown Rate
This feature lets you shut down the line following a failed line leak test. The choices are 3.0 gph (11.3 lph), 0.2 gph
(0.76 lph), 0.1 gph (0.38 lph), or none.
W1: (WPLLD Line Label)
SHUTDOWN RATE: 3.0 GPH

Note: you must have steel or fiberglass line types, and the Precision WPLLD software module key installed in your
system to select shutdown rates of 0.2 gph or 0.1 gph.
Press STEP to accept the 3.0 gph shutdown rate, or press CHANGE until the desired shutdown rate appears,
then ENTER to confirm your choice. NOTE: if you select a 0.1 gph shutdown rate, a failed 0.1 gph, 0.2 gph, or 3.0
gph leak test will disable dispensing. If you select a shutdown rate of 3.0 gph, then only a failed 3.0 gph leak test
will disable dispensing, while a failed 0.2 gph or 0.1 gph leak test will just trigger an alarm. If you select None, no
failed test will shut down the line.
Press STEP to continue.

Pressure Offset
New transducers are now factory sealed and their internal chamber cannot be equalized to atmospheric pressure
by opening a vent screw as in the past. The Pressure Offset test procedure described in this addendum must be
performed when using new WPLLD transducers with serial numbers of 100,000 or above, in sites located at
altitudes above 2,000 feet (609 m). Note: this procedure can also be used with transducers having serial numbers
below 100,000 instead of using the vent screw to equalize pressure.
See Table 10-1 on page 10-8 for approximate absolute pressures that are for reference only. The transducer’s
actual reading may vary slightly due to its construction, A/D conversion, head pressure in the lines, etc.
Before this procedure is performed, the pressure in the line MUST be vented to zero. It is recommended that this
procedure be performed immediately after installing the transducer, before energizing the STP.

11-4

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Pressure Offset

The first step is to vent the line(s). The second step is to go to the Diagnostic Mode and run a Pressure Offset Test
for each transducer to determine its Pressure Offset value. The third step is to return to the Setup Mode and enter
the Pressure Offset determined in the tests, for each transducer.

VENTING THE LINE
OFF

1. Turn Off, lock out, tag power to the STP.
2. Vent the line to zero. IMPORTANT - The STP is actually turned On for the WPLLD test, so be sure to reseal the
lines after venting.
3. Reseal the line.
4. Turn On power to the STP. Follow the procedure below.

DETERMINING A PRESSURE OFFSET VALUE FOR EACH TRANSDUCER
Press MODE to display DIAGNOSTIC MODE, then FUNCTION until you see the message:
WPLLD LINE LEAK DIAG
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

From the WPLLD Diag message, press STEP until you see the display below
W 1: WPLLD NUMBER 1
P OFFSET TEST 

Press ENTER and the results of the last test displays (‘No Test Data Available’ message appears if this is the first
test):
W 1: PRESS OFFSET TST PSI
9-30-99 03:10AM +3.2

Press STEP:
W 1: START P OFFSET TEST
PRESS 

To start the test, press ENTER. During the test this message appears:
W 1: PRESSURE OFFSET TEST
MEASURING

The Pressure Offset test results message appears when the test ends:
W 1: PRESSURE OFFSET TEST
DONE - OFFSET: +XX.X PSI

You can print out the test result if you have an optional printer. If you do not have a printer, record the offset value
for the transducer. Press Tank/Sensor and repeat the above procedure for all installed transducers.
The maximum offset pressure range is ±5 psi (±34.5 kPa). If a Pressure Offset is greater than ±5 psi (±34.5 kPa),
repeat the test. If the Pressure Offset is again out of range, either the line pressure is not completely vented or
there is a hardware problem. Refer to WPLLD troubleshooting procedures for further instructions.

11-5

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Tank Selection

ENTERING THE PRESSURE OFFSET VALUE FOR EACH TRANSDUCER
Press MODE to return to the SETUP MODE, then FUNCTION until you see the message:
WPLLD LINE LEAK SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP until you see the message:
W 1: WPLLD NUMBER 1
PRESSURE OFFSET: +XX.X

Press CHANGE and enter the Pressure Offset value for transducer W1. If necessary, press the left arrow key to
change the sign (+ or -). Note: enter the Offset value exactly as displayed in the Offset test result message
(including + or - sign). Press TANK/SENSOR, to display another transducer. Press CHANGE to enter its Pressure
Offset value, then ENTER to confirm the change. Repeat this procedure until you have entered Offsets for all
transducers.

Tank Selection
This entry allows a tank’s WPLLD to act as a pump sense input for automatic in-tank leak detection, CSLD,
catastrophic leak testing and other features. This step can only be used for tanks that are not already connected to
a line leak detector. This message appears only if tanks have been configured in the In-Tank Setup procedure.
W1: SELECT TANK
NONE

For no selection press STEP to continue. If yes, press CHANGE until the tank number to which the particular
WPLLD is connected appears, then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
T#: (Product Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Selecting a Dispense Mode
NOTE: This option will only appear if a tank has been selected for the WPLLD.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
W1: ENTER DISPENSE MODE
XXXXXXXXX

This entry asks you to select the dispense mode. You can select between:

• STANDARD - Only one pump feeds the line.

11-6

11 Wireless Pressurized Line Leak Detection

Setting Up Additional WPLLDs

• MANIFOLDED: ALTERNATE1 - The pump will run in the tank with the greatest inventory volume.
• MANIFOLDED: SEQUENTIAL1 - The tanks are pumped low one at a time. When the tank’s volume drops
below the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over immediately to the next available tank
in the line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for another 10 seconds to avoid a
disruption in dispensing during the switch over. (see “Pump Threshold” on page 7-26).

• MANIFOLDED: ALL PUMPS - All pumps on the line are run.
Press CHANGE until your choice appears then press ENTER to continue.

Setting Up Additional WPLLDs
If you have additional WPLLDs to set up, press STEP to return to the WPLLD LINE LABEL message:
WPLLD LINE LABEL
W1:

Press TANK to access another WPLLD. Repeat the steps described above, beginning with “Labeling WPLLDs”
on page 11-2. After you have entered setup information for all WPLLDs in the system, press FUNCTION to exit.

1. To prevent backfilling, the level of all tanks connected to the line will be monitored. If the level of any tank
exceeds 95% of the Max or Label Volume limit (see “Max or Label Vol” on page 7-15), the pump for that
tank will also be turned on during dispensing. The state of the pump that was already ON will not be
changed.

11-7

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection
This function allows you to enter information about Volumetric Line Leak Detectors (VLLDs) installed on product
pipelines in the system. You must enter data individually for each line leak detector.

VLLD Setup
To select Volumetric Line Leak Detector Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
LINE LEAK DETECTOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Activating VLLDs
If necessary, press STEP until you see the following message:
LINE CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT# - X

This display allows you to activate the Line Leak Detectors in a module. In the active state, the detector attempts to
conduct line leak tests whenever the dispensers are off. To activate a detector, you must replace the X with a 1. To
leave a detector inactive, choose an X for the position.
To set up the detector, press CHANGE in response to the LINE CONFIG message until the correct choice
appears (1 to activate, X to deactivate). Press ENTER to confirm your choices. The system displays:
SLOT# - 1
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

NOTE: Slot 1 is the slot at the bottom (not the top) of the compartment as shown on the circuit directory inside the
console door.
Press STEP to continue. The system automatically displays a LINE CONFIG message for each Line Leak Detector
Module installed in the system. When you have configured all the modules, press STEP to display the ENTER
PIPE LABEL message.

Pipe Label and Tank Identification
If necessary, press STEP until you see the following message:
ENTER PIPE LABEL
P#:

This display allows you to enter a label that will identify the pipe being monitored (location, fuel type, etc.).
If needed, press TANK to access any other Line Leak Detector in the system.

12-1

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Enter Dispense Mode

When the appropriate detector appears on the screen, press CHANGE. Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters
for the pipe label and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
P1: SELECT TANK
TANK#:

Enter the number of the tank on which the Line Leak Detector has been installed. This number must be the same
number assigned to the tank by the system during the in-tank setup. (Refer to In-Tank Setup, Section 7.)
NOTE: If you are uncertain of the tank number, print an inventory report and review the tank number assignments.
The system automatically picks up important tank data and includes this information in alarm and status reports.
NOTE: Except for the LINE CONFIG message, you may use the TANK button at any time during the Setup
procedure to access another Line Leak Detector.
To enter the number of the tank on which the Line Leak Detector has been installed, press CHANGE and enter a
number between 1 and 8. Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TANK #: X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Enter Dispense Mode
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: ENTER DISPENSE MODE
STANDARD

This step lets you choose the dispense mode of the tank(s) on which the Line Leak Detector has been installed.
The choices are:

• STANDARD - Only one pump feeds the line.
• MANIFOLDED: ALTERNATE1 - The pump will run in the tank with the greatest inventory volume.
• MANIFOLDED: SEQUENTIAL1 -The tanks are pumped low one at a time. When the tank’s volume drops below
the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over immediately to the next available tank in the
line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for another 10 seconds to avoid a disruption in
dispensing during the switch over. (see “Pump Threshold” on page 7-26).

• MANIFOLDED: ALL PUMPS - All pumps on the line are run.
To select Standard (the system default), press STEP. To choose one of the Manifolded options, press CHANGE
until the option you want appears. Then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:

1. To prevent backfilling, the level of all tanks connected to the line will be monitored. If the level of any tank
exceeds 95% of the Max or Label Volume limit (see “Max or Label Vol” on page 7-15), the pump for that tank
will also be turned on during dispensing. The state of the pump that was already ON will not be changed.

12-2

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Fuel Type

P#: (Dispense Mode)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Fuel Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
FUEL TYPE: GASOLINE

Use this display to specify the type of fuel running through the assigned product line. To accept Gasoline for the
Fuel Type, press STEP. (The system proceeds to the 2” PIPING LENGTH message.) To choose Diesel, press
CHANGE in response to the FUEL TYPE message and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the
message:
FUEL TYPE: DIESEL
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

NOTE: If a fuel other than diesel or gasoline is used, select the type that is closest in viscosity to the fuel that is
being dispensed.
Press STEP to continue.

Piping Length and Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
2” PIPING LENGTH: 000

To enter the length of 2-inch (50 mm) piping in the line, press CHANGE. Enter the length. Press ENTER. The
system confirms your entry:
2” PIPING LENGTH: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message that allows you to enter the total length of 3-inch (76 mm) piping in the
system:
P#: (Pipe Label)
3” PIPING LENGTH: 000

To enter the 3-inch piping length, press CHANGE. Enter the length. Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry
with the message:
3” PIPING LENGTH: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

12-3

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Pump Pressure

Press STEP to display the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
PIPE TYPE: STEEL

Use this display to enter the type of piping material of fiberglass, steel, 2-wall fiber (fiberglass), or flexible.
If the piping is made of steel, press STEP to continue, or press CHANGE until the correct piping material appears,
then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
PIPING TYPE: (Choice)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Pump Pressure
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
PUMP PSI:

Use this display to enter the pump pressure in the pipeline.
To enter the pump pressure, press CHANGE. Enter the pump pressure to the nearest whole number. Refer to
Table 12-1 for nominal pressures:
Table 12-1.- Submersible Pump Nominal Pressures
Pump Brand
Red Jacket

Red Jacket
Big-Flo

Tokheim

FE Petro

FE Petro
Hi Capacity

Model

HP

PSI

KPA

P33R1

1/3

25

172

P75S1

3/4

27

186

P150S1

1-1/2

29

200

P200U1

2

45

310

X315OU1

1-1/2

43

297

P200H3-2MB

2 (2-stage)

44

304

P300H3-2HB

3 (2-stage)

34

237

P500H3-2K

5 (2-stage)

40

279

585-13

1/3

23

159

585-34

3/4

25

172

585-150

1-1/2

27

186

STP33

1/3

27

186

STP75

3/4

30

207

STP150

1-1/2

33

228

STP3HP

3

33

229

STP5HP

5

39

272

12-4

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Shutdown Rate

Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
PUMP PSI: XXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Shutdown Rate
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label
SHUTDOWN: 3.0 GPH

Line leak detectors are required by law to shut down the submersible if the system detects a 3.0 gph (11.3 lph)
leak. Using this feature, you may program the system to shut down the submersible when it detects leaks of 3.0
gph, 0.2 gph (0.76 lph), or 0.1 gph (0.38 lph).
To accept a shutdown leak rate of 3.0 gph, press STEP, or press CHANGE until the desired shutdown rate
appears, then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
SHUTDOWN: (X.X) GPH
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Pumpside Test
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
PUMPSIDE TEST: ENABLED

After the system conducts a line leak test, the line leak detector also runs a pump side test for a pressure loss in
the piping and connections between the in-line check valve and the submersible pump.
Leak detection for components prior to the check valve must be provided. This can be done through use of VLLD
programmed pump side testing, installation of containment sumps and sensors, or other suitable means. Failure to
provide leak detection capability for components prior to the VLLD check valve could allow undetected product
leakage with possible contamination of the environment.
To accept ENABLED press STEP. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to disable the test. The system confirms your
choice with the message:
PUMPSIDE TEST DISABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

12-5

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Wait Mode

Wait Mode
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: (Pipe Label)
WAIT MODE: TEMP. MEAS.

Wait Mode selects which method the system uses to determine thermal stability before performing a line leak test,
TEMP. MEAS. (temperature measurement) or VOL. CHG. MEAS. (volume change measurement).
Select TEMP. MEAS. if your system has both an in-tank probe and a ground thermistor installed, and has lines less
than 500 feet (151 m) in length.
Select VOL. CHG. MEAS. if your system does not have both in-tank probe and ground thermistor installed, or your
system has lines over 500 feet in length.
NOTE: If you are using flexible piping, you cannot use the VOL. CHG. MEAS. option.
Press STEP to accept TEMP. MEAS., or CHANGE then ENTER to select VOL. CHG. MEAS. The system
confirms your choice with the message:
WAIT MODE: VOL. CHG. MEAS.
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

New Blender Protocol (NBP) Partner
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
P#: SELECT NBP PARTNER
NONE

The NBP (New Blender Protocol) Partner feature allows LLDs attached to lines, where products are blended at
the pump using a blend valve, to continue operating if the blend valve leaks. The recommended setting is NONE.
However, if line leak failures repeatedly occur because of blend valve anomalies, choose the corresponding
blended line number (determined by the number of volumetric LLDs).
NOTE: NBP is normally used for mechanical blenders only.
To accept None for the NBP Partner, press STEP. (The system displays the LAST ANNUAL TEST PASSED
message).
To choose a pipeline for the NBP Partner, press CHANGE in response to the NBP PARTNER message. Select
the desired line and press ENTER. The system displays the message:
(Blend Partner)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

12-6

12 Volumetric Line Leak Detection

Last Annual Test Passed

Last Annual Test Passed
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
LAST ANNUAL TEST PASSED
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX

Use this display to enter the date of the last annual test passed.
NOTE: This message only appears if “Annual Warning” was enabled in System Setup.
To enter the date of the last annual test passed, press CHANGE and enter the date. Press ENTER to confirm your
entry:
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Setting Up Additional Line Leak Detectors
If you have additional Line Leak Detectors to set up, press STEP to return to the ENTER PIPE LABEL message:
ENTER PIPE LABEL
P#:

Press TANK to access a new Line Leak Detector. Repeat the steps described above beginning with “Pipe Label
and Tank Identification” on page 12-1.
If you have entered setup information for all Volumetric Line Leak Detectors in the system, press FUNCTION to
exit.

12-7

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests
The Volumetric Line Leak Detection (VLLD) system performs fully automatic test routines after each dispense
cycle. In addition, Volumetric Line Leak Detectors may be programmed for testing at a specified time or date.
The Line Leak Test Setup function lets you set the test method, schedule, and test rate for programmed automatic
line leak tests. Programmed tests continue to run according to the schedule you enter until you change the
parameters or disable the test.
NOTE: Line leak tests also may be started at any time from Operating Mode.

Selecting the Line Leak Test Setup Function
To select Line Leak Test Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
LINE LEAK TEST SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Setup Method: All Lines/Single Lines
If necessary, press STEP until you see the following message:
LEAK TEST METHOD
ALL LINES

You can run line leak tests using the same test conditions (frequency, start time, and test rate) for all lines, or you
can establish different test conditions for each line.
To specify the same test conditions for all lines, press STEP. The system displays the following message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

To specify different test conditions for each line, press CHANGE in response to the LEAK TEST METHOD
message, so the system displays SINGLE LINE. Press ENTER and press STEP. The system now displays the
message:
SINGLE LINE: LINE 1
ON DATE

Whether you choose ALL LINES or SINGLE LINE, the procedure for specifying a set of test conditions is
identical. The only difference is that the SINGLE LINE method requires you to specify multiple test conditions, one
for each line.
NOTE: The screen examples shown in this procedure assume that you have selected the ALL LINES method. If
you choose SINGLE LINE, the line number (e.g., LINE 1) appears in place of “ALL LINES” in each message.

13-1

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

Leak Test Frequency
As mentioned, when you select a leak test method—ALL LINES in this example—the system displays the message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

You can now choose to run the line leak tests on a specific date, or you can run the tests on an annual, monthly,
weekly, or daily basis.

ON DATE
To run the test on a specific date, press STEP in response to the ON DATE message. (To run the test annually,
monthly, weekly, or daily, follow the procedures described in the appropriate section below.) The system displays
the message:
TEST ON DATE: ALL LINES
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX

Press CHANGE, and enter the date on which you want the tests to run. Enter the date in the format MM/DD/
YYYY. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 13-4.

ANNUAL TEST
To run the tests annually, press CHANGE and press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
ANNUALLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue setting the annual test. The system displays the message:
TEST ANNUALLY: ALL LINES
JAN WEEK 1 MON

To set the date of the annual test, press CHANGE until the month during which you want to perform the test
appears, and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the week during which you want to perform the test
appears and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test
appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
MONTH WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

13-2

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests

Leak Test Frequency

For example, if you chose to run the tests on the Friday of the first week of June, the system would display the
message:
JUNE WEEK 1 FRI
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 13-4.

MONTHLY TEST
To run the tests monthly, press CHANGE twice, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
MONTHLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
TEST MONTHLY: ALL LINES
WEEK 1 MON

To set the date of the monthly test, press CHANGE until the week during which you want to perform the test
appears, and press the Right Arrow key. Press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test
appears. Press ENTER to confirm the date:
WEEK DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 13-4.

WEEKLY TEST
To run the tests weekly, press CHANGE three times, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
WEEKLY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
TEST WEEKLY: ALL LINES
MON

13-3

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests

Leak Test Start Time

To set the date of the weekly test, press CHANGE until the day on which you want to perform the test appears.
Press ENTER to confirm the date:
DAY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under “Leak Test
Start Time” on page 13-4.

DAILY TEST
To run the tests daily, press CHANGE four times, then press ENTER in response to the ON DATE message:
ALL LINES:
ON DATE

The system displays the message:
TEST DAILY: ALL LINES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. The system displays the START TIME message. Follow the procedure under below.

Leak Test Start Time
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
START TIME: ALL LINES
TIME: DISABLED

You can enable the test by entering a start time or leave the test disabled.
To leave the test disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the TEST RATE message.)
To enter a test start time, press CHANGE in response to the START TIME message. Enter the start time and press
the Right Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

NOTE: The system automatically establishes the correct test length.
Press STEP to continue.

Leak Test Rate
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TEST RATE: ALL LINES
0.20 GAL/HR

13-4

13 Volumetric Line Leak Tests

Setting Up Additional Lines

You can set the test leak rate to 0.2 or 0.1 gph (0.76 or 0.38 lph). The default test rate is 0.2 gph. To accept the
default test rate, press STEP. To set the test rate to 0.1 gph, press CHANGE and press ENTER to confirm your
choice. The system displays the following message:
X.X GAL/HR
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Setting Up Additional Lines
To set up line leak tests for additional lines, press STEP to return to the TEST SINGLE LINE message:
TEST SINGLE LINE: LINE 1
ON DATE

Press TANK to select the next line. Repeat the steps described above beginning with “Leak Test Frequency” on
page 13-2.
If you are setting up the test for All Lines, or have completed setting up all individual lines, the setup is complete.
Press FUNCTION to exit.

13-5

14

Line Leak Test Lockout

The line leak detection system cannot test a line when AC power to the submersible pump is shut off. Since the
line leak system automatically attempts to conduct a test whenever it receives a signal that the dispenser is off, it is
necessary to lock out line tests when the station or fueling site is shut down and submersible pump power is off. In
some areas, regulations prohibit leaving power to submersibles switched On during hours when the site is
unattended.
The Line Leak Test Lockout function provides a flexible means of locking out line leak tests in accordance with
business hours. This feature sets lockout times for VLLD, WPLLD, and PLLD leak detection systems.

Selecting the Line Leak Test Lockout Function
To select Line Leak Test Lockout Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
LINE LEAK LOCKOUT SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Lockout Schedule
The Lockout schedule identifies the hours not to run line leak tests for the station. There are two types of
schedules for test lockouts: Daily and Individual.
A Daily schedule allows you to enter a Lockout Start Time and Lockout Stop Time. The lockout period will begin
and end at these times every day of the week. Note: By using a Daily schedule and entering the same Start and
Stop Times, you can lock out the line leak test function 24 hours per day. This accommodates vacation shutdowns.
An Individual schedule allows you to enter seven separate lockout periods to provide varying lockout schedules.
You may program each lockout period with a Start Day and Time, and a Stop Day and Time. For example, lockouts
1 through 5 could be programmed to lock out the line leak test each day from Monday through Friday to
accommodate hours when the fueling site is not operating at night. Lockout 6 could be programmed to lock out
the test from Friday night to Monday morning if the site is closed for the weekend.
IMPORTANT! If lockout schedules are programmed incorrectly, the line leak tests may not run. Make sure you have
programmed the settings correctly.

Daily Schedule
Once you have selected the Line Leak Test Lockout Setup function, press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT SCHEDULE
DAILY

To accept the daily schedule, press STEP. The system displays the message:
DAILY LOCKOUT
START TIME: DISABLED

14-1

14 Line Leak Test Lockout

Individual Schedules

Press CHANGE and enter the daily lockout start time. Press the Right Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press
ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
DAILY LOCKOUT
STOP TIME: DISABLED

Press CHANGE and enter the daily lockout stop time. Press the Right Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press
ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press FUNCTION to exit or press STEP to return to the LOCKOUT SCHEDULE message.

Individual Schedules
Once you have selected the Line Leak Test Lockout Setup function, press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT SCHEDULE
DAILY

Press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
INDIVIDUAL
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT #: 1
START DAY: MON

If you want to change the lockout schedule number (you can have up to seven individual lockout schedules), press
TANK.
NOTE: Do not press ENTER after changing the lockout schedule number. You must enter the Start Day
(described below) before pressing ENTER.
To set the start day for the lockout schedule number displayed, press CHANGE until the day that you want
appears. Press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
START DAY: (Day)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT #1: (Day) (START)
TIME: DISABLED

14-2

14 Line Leak Test Lockout

Entering Additional Test Lockout Schedules

To set the lockout start time for the lockout number displayed, press CHANGE and enter the time. Press the Right
Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
START TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT #1:
STOP DAY: MON

To set the stop day for the lockout number displayed, press CHANGE until the day that you want appears. Press
ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
STOP DAY: (Day)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
LOCKOUT #: (Day) (STOP)
TIME: DISABLED

Press CHANGE and enter the lockout stop time. Press the Right Arrow key to select AM or PM. Press ENTER.
The system displays the message:
STOP TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Entering Additional Test Lockout Schedules
To enter additional line leak test lockout schedules, press STEP to return to the LOCKOUT #: START DAY
message, or press FUNCTION to exit.

14-3

15

Pump Sense Setup

The Pump Sense function monitors pump on/off status to ensure that in-tank leak tests are not scheduled when
the pumps are operating.

Selecting the Pump Sense Function
To select Pump Sense Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
PUMP SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Pump Sense Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PUMPSENS CONFIG: MODULE1
SLOT # - X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which Pump Sense module inputs are connected to pump controllers.
NOTE: If Pump Sense modules are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES PUMP SENSE MODULES
If Pump Sense modules are installed, the system recognizes their presence and slot locations. The system also
establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if Pump Sense modules are installed in slots
#10 and #13, the module in slot #10 automatically becomes module #1 and the module in slot #13 becomes
module #2.
As you specify which positions on a module are connected to which pumps, the system assigns a number, for
each pump, that corresponds to its position on the module. For example, if there is a pump connected to inputs 3
and 4 of module 1, the pump connected to position 3 becomes S3 and the pump connected to position 4
becomes S4.

SPECIFYING PUMP SENSE POSITIONS
If position 1 is connected to a pump controller, press CHANGE and 1 appears (leave the X selection if no pump
input is connected to position 1). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2. If a pump is connected to this
input, press CHANGE and a 2 appears (leave X if there is no connection). Repeat these steps until you have all 4
positions for the module selected. Press ENTER to confirm your selections. The system displays the following
message (in this example the first 3 positions are connected to pump controllers:
SLOT # - 1 2 3 X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the PUMPSENS CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configured all modules, and the system displays the SELECT TANK message.

15-1

15 Pump Sense Setup

Pump Sense Tank Number

Pump Sense Tank Number
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SX: SELECT TANK
NONE

In this step you assign each connected pump controller (selected above) to the tank in which it is installed (only
configured Pump Sense module inputs will appear). The default value is for this display is NONE. Press CHANGE
until the correct tank number for the first pump controller is visible. Press the TANK/SENSOR key to view the next
pump controller. Press CHANGE to select its correct tank number. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The
system displays the following message:
T#: [Product Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the Enter Dispense Mode screen.

Pump Sense Dispense Mode
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
S1: ENTER DISPENSE MODE
STANDARD

In this step you select the dispense mode of the tank. The choices are:

• STANDARD - Only one pump feeds the line.
• MANIFOLDED: ALTERNATE 1- The pump will run in the tank with the greatest inventory volume.
• MANIFOLDED: SEQUENTIAL1 - The tanks are pumped low one at a time. When the tank’s volume drops
below the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over immediately to the next available tank
in the line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for another 10 seconds to avoid a
disruption in dispensing during the switch over. (see “Pump Threshold” on page 7-26).

• MANIFOLDED: ALL PUMPS - All pumps on the line are run.
To select Standard (the system default) press STEP, or press CHANGE until the option you want appears. Then
press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
S1: (Dispense Mode)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press TANK/SENSOR to enter a dispense mode for the next pump controller’s tank. When you have entered
setup information for all pump controller’s tanks, press FUNCTION to exit.

1. To prevent backfilling, the level of all tanks connected to the line will be monitored. If the level of any tank
exceeds 95% of the Max or Label Volume limit (see “Max or Label Vol” on page 7-15), the pump for that
tank will also be turned on during dispensing. The state of the pump that was already ON will not be
changed.

15-2

16

Pump Relay Monitor Setup

The Pump Relay Monitor function allows you to monitor a pump’s On/Off state to determine if the pump is not
turning off when instructed to do so (TLS controlled pump), or if its relay is stuck (non-TLS controlled pump).

Selecting the Pump Relay Monitor Function
To select Pump Relay Monitor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
PUMP RELAY MONITOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Pump Relay Monitor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PUMP MON CONFIG: MODULE1
SLOT # - X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which Pump Relay Monitor module inputs are connected to which pumps.
NOTE: If Pump Relay Monitor modules are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES PUMP RELAY MONITOR MODULES
If Pump Relay Monitor modules are installed, the system recognizes their presence and slot locations. The system
also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if Pump Relay Monitor modules are
installed in slots #10 and #13, the module in slot #10 automatically becomes module #1 and the module in slot
#13 becomes module #2.
As you specify which positions on a module are connected to which pumps, the system assigns a number, for
each pump, that corresponds to its position on the module. For example, if there is a pump connected to inputs 3
and 4 of module 1, the pump connected to position 3 becomes r3 and the pump connected to position 4
becomes r4.

SPECIFYING PUMP RELAY MONITOR POSITIONS
If position 1 is connected to a pump controller, press CHANGE and 1 appears (leave the X selection if no pump
input is connected to position 1). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2. If a pump is connected to this
input, press CHANGE and a 2 appears (leave X if there is no connection). Repeat these steps until you have all 4
positions for the module selected. Press ENTER to confirm your selections. The system displays the following
message (in this example the first 3 positions are connected to pump controllers:
SLOT # - 1 2 3 X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the PUMP MON CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configured all modules, and the system displays the SELECT TANK message.

16-1

16 Pump Relay Monitor Setup

Labeling Pump Relay Monitors

Labeling Pump Relay Monitors
This display allows you to identify the pump being monitored by a particular Pump Relay Monitor relay (tank, fuel
type, etc.).
ENTER PUMP MONITOR LABEL
rX: (pump monitor label)

If necessary, press TANK/SENSOR to select the desired Pump Relay Monitor relay in the system.
When the appropriate relay appears in the display, press CHANGE. (To erase a label press CHANGE again.)
Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the line label and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with
the message:
r1: (pump monitor label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Pump Relay Monitor Relay Input
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
rX: SELECT PUMP RELAY
NONE

In this step you assign each connected pump to its relay control type:

• NONE - TLS does not control the pump (default selection)
Choose this selection to monitor the pump each time it switches on, and if it is still running after a 1 - 24 hour
delay (Max Run Time delay), to post an alarm.

• Enter the device code, number, and label of the controlling relay (e.g., Pump Sense, PLLD, WPLLD, VLLD,
Pump Control Output - I/O Combo or 4-Relay). For any of these entries, if the pump continues to run after it is
instructed to turn off, for longer than a 5 - 600 second selectable delay (Stuck Delay), an alarm is posted.
The default value for this display is NONE. Press CHANGE until the correct relay for the first pump is visible.
Press the TANK/SENSOR key to view the next pump controller. Press CHANGE to select its correct relay control
type. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.

Pump Relay Monitor Delay Input
If necessary, press STEP until you see one of the messages below.
If NONE was selected for Pump Relay:
r#: [pump monitor label)
MAX RUN TIME (HR): 8

If a controlling relay was selected for Pump Relay:
r#: [pump monitor label)
STUCK DELAY (SEC): 60

OR

If Stuck Delay, select from 5 to 600 seconds (60 is default). If Max Run Time, select from 1 to 24 hours (8 is
default). Press CHANGE to enter another selection and press ENTER to confirm your change.

16-2

17

Reconciliation Setup

To select Reconciliation Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
RECONCILIATION SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.
International installations - for consoles without BIR, the HRM Features DIP switch [see Figure 8 on page 5-3]
must be enabled to enter Reconciliation Setup.

Dispenser Module Data String
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
DISP. MODULE DATA STRING
EDIM #X: XXXXXXXX

Device codes for the two types of DIM modules are a “M” for Mechanical Dispenser Interface Modules (MDIM),
and an “E” for Electronic Dispenser Interface Modules (EDIM). All EDIM modules install in the Comm Bay of the
console and include; Current Loop, Block, RS-232, IFSF, and RS-485 dispenser interface modules. All MDIM
modules install in the Power Bay of the console and include; Low Voltage Mechanical, and High Voltage
Mechanical Dispenser Interface Modules.
When a BDIM, EDIM, or CDIM is installed, the system will recognize its presence and position in the Comm Bay
of the console. When a MDIM is installed, the system will recognize its presence and position in the Power Bay.
To enter a dispenser module data string, press CHANGE, enter a valid DIM description selected from the
appropriate DIM Installation Manual. The system accepts up to twelve alphanumeric characters; however, it reads
only the first eight. If no data are entered, the DIM defaults are used.
After entering your description, press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the following message:
XDIM#X: [Description]
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If more than one DIM is installed, the system will automatically advance to the next module when setup for one is
complete. You can also press TANK to select a specific module. When all DIM modules have been set up, press
STEP to advance to the next feature. (The system displays the AUTOMATIC DAILY CLOSING message.)

Automatic Daily Closing
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTOMATIC DAILY CLOSING
TIME: 2:00 AM

Enter the time you wish to designate as the daily closing time. At the programmed time, the system stores the
current day’s data, and prints a report if “Daily BIR Reports” was set to enabled in System Setup (page 5-5). The
default time is set to 2:00 a.m. This feature cannot be disabled.

17-1

17 Reconciliation Setup

Automatic Shift Closing

To accept the default time, press STEP. (The system displays the AUTO SHIFT #1 CLOSING message.) To enter
a different closing time, press CHANGE and enter the desired time. Press the Left or Right Arrow to select AM or
PM. Press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Automatic Shift Closing
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
AUTO SHIFT #1 CLOSING
TIME: DISABLED

Refer to your Shift Start Times in the System Setup Function (see “Shift Start Times” on page 5-4) to determine
the Automatic Shift Closing Times:

• Shift Closing Time #1 should match Shift Start Time #2
• Shift Closing Time #2 should match Shift Start Time #3
• Shift Closing Time #3 should match Shift Start Time #4
• Shift Closing Time #4 should match Shift Start Time #1
At each programmed time, a new shift close report will automatically be printed [if Shift BIR Reports was enabled
in System Setup (page 5-5)], and stored in memory.
To leave a shift closing time disabled, press STEP. (The system displays the AUTO SHIFT CLOSING TIME
message for the next shift.)
To set a closing time for shift #1, press CHANGE and enter the appropriate time. Press the Left or Right Arrow to
select AM or PM. Then press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
TIME: XX:XX XM
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the next AUTO SHIFT CLOSING TIME message:
AUTO SHIFT #2 CLOSING
TIME: DISABLED

Repeat the above procedures to enter or disable closing times for shifts 2, 3, and 4.When you have entered or
disabled a closing time for shift 4, the system displays the PERIODIC RECONCILIATION MODE message.

Periodic Reconciliation Mode
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PERIODIC RECONCILIATION
MODE: MONTHLY

Periodic Reconciliation Mode allows you to print a summary report of the activity during the last month or period,
up to the last scheduled daily closing. If you choose MONTHLY, a report will automatically print on the first day of

17-2

17 Reconciliation Setup

Periodic Reconciliation Alarm

each month. If you choose ROLLING, a report will automatically be printed at the end of the interval you choose (1
- 31 days).
To accept MONTHLY, press STEP. (The system displays the PERIODIC RECONCILIATION ALARM message.)
To switch to ROLLING, press CHANGE and press ENTER. They system displays:
MODE: ROLLING
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the following message:
PERIODIC RECONCILIATION
LENGTH: XX DAYS

Press CHANGE. Enter the number of days (1–31) between the printing of each periodic reconciliation report.
Then press ENTER. The system confirms your entry with the message:
LENGTH: XX DAYS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Periodic Reconciliation Alarm
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
PERIODIC RECONCILIATION
ALARM: DISABLED

If enabled, the Periodic Reconciliation Alarm will be activated when the programmed threshold for discrepancies
between fuel delivery amount and dispensed fuel amount is exceeded. The system default is 1.00% of throughput
plus 130 gallons (492 litres) offset. In the U.S. the EPA has set this default as a criteria not to be exceeded. The
Periodic Reconciliation Alarm is triggered when the alarm threshold plus offset exceeds the allowed variance.
To leave the Periodic Reconciliation Alarm disabled, press STEP until you see the REMOTE REPORT FORMAT
message. (The system displays the PERIODIC RECONCILIATION ALARM THRESHOLD message.)
To enable the Periodic Reconciliation Alarm, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system confirms your entry
with the message:
ALARM: ENABLED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
PERIODIC RECONCILIATION
ALARM THRESHOLD: 1.00

Press CHANGE. Enter the percent of total meter sales (throughput). Note - the Alarm Threshold must be
between 0.00 and 5.00 percent.
Press ENTER. The system confirms you entry with the message:
ALARM THRESHOLD: X.XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

17-3

17 Reconciliation Setup

Remote Report Format

Press STEP. The system displays the message:
PERIODIC RECONCILIATION
ALARM OFFSET: 000130

Press CHANGE. Enter the number of gallons (litres) of allowable variance. Press ENTER. The system confirms
your entry with the message:
ALARM OFFSET: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Remote Report Format
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
REMOTE REPORT FORMAT
SELECT: ROW

NOTE: This feature appears only when a remote printer is installed.
You can choose between ROW and COLUMN printer formats. To maintain the default or current setting, press
STEP. (The system displays the MODIFY TANK/METER MAP message.)
To change the default or current setting, e.g., from ROW to COLUMN, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The
system confirms your entry with the message:
SELECT: COLUMN
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Temp Compensation
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
TEMP COMPENSATION
STANDARD

This feature allows you to choose whether or not to calculate Business Inventory Reconciliation (BIR) volumes
using the Programmable Temperature Compensation (TC) value. For information on entering this value, (See
“Temperature Compensation Value” on page 13.). Select STANDARD (the default) if the meters are not
temperature compensated. Select TC VOLUME if the meters are temperature compensated (the calculation of all
BIR volumes will be based on the TC value).
Press STEP to accept STANDARD. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to select TC VOLUME. The system confirms
your choice with the message:
TC VOLUME
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

17-4

17 Reconciliation Setup

Meter Calibration Offset

Meter Calibration Offset
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
METER CALIBRATION
OFFSET: +0.000

This feature only appears if BIR is installed. The Meter Calibration offset is added to the dispensed amount
received. The default value is 0.000%. You can enter an offset from -1.000 to +1.000%. Press CHANGE and
enter the desired value (e.g., 0.250%). Press ENTER and the system confirms your choice with the message:
METER CALIBRATION
OFFSET: +0.250

Press STEP to continue.

Modify Tank/Meter Map
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
MODIFY TANK/METER MAP
PRESS 

Meter data sent from a POS terminal to a TLS 350R console may be collected from a tank that does not have a
probe. Probes collect height data needed for Business Inventory Reconciliation (BIR). This feature allows you to
assign a meter to a tank that does not have a probe so that BIR can still function.
Note: the system must be configured before you can modify the tank/meter map.
Press ENTER to change the tank/meter map and the system displays:
BUS SLOT FUEL METER TANK
XX
XX
X
XX
XX

Press +/- or
to move to the field you want to change. Then press CHANGE until the correct choice appears.
Press ENTER to confirm your change. Press PRINT to output a report of the current meter map for reference
before proceeding.
The values you may enter are:
Bus--Power or Communications Bay of the console in which the Dispenser Interface Module (DIM) card is placed.

• 2: Power Bay (MDIMs)
• 3: Communication Bay (BDIMs, EDIMs, or CDIMs)
Slot--Slot in which the DIM card is placed.

• 9 - 16 (where 9 is the bottom slot): Slots on Type 2 bus
• 1 - 3 (where 1 is the left-most slot): Slots on Type 3 bus
Fuel--Fueling position number reported by the POS terminal. This number can range from 0 - 99. There is a
maximum of 36 unique fueling position numbers.
Meter--Meter number reported by POS terminal. This number can range from 0 - 99. There is a maximum of 6
unique meter numbers per fueling position.
Tank--One of the following:

17-5

17 Reconciliation Setup

Modify Tank/Meter Map

• 99: Tank with no probe
• 00: Remove meter from tank/meter map
• xx: Any tank number set up for BIR. (Note: only the primary tank needs to be entered for a manifolded set of
tanks. The primary tank is the tank with the lowest number in the set. If a tank number is entered that is part of a
manifolded set, but it is not the primary tank, the selection will be rejected.)
Press STEP until you see the message:
INDIVIDUAL METER OFFSET
PRESS 

Ticketed Delivery must be enabled to view this menu.

Press STEP to return to the Disp. Module Data String menu if DIM is installed or to Automatic Daily Closing menu
if DIM is not installed; or press ENTER to change the meter offset for the selected fuel position/meter. The system
displays:
FUEL METER TANK OFFSET
XX
XX
XX
+X.XX

Then press CHANGE. The Offset value flashes ‘0’. Enter the desired offset in increments of ±0.01% with a
mximum range of ±9.99% and Press ENTER to confirm your change. Press STEP to continue to the next meter.
Press FUNCTION to exit the Reconciliation Setup function.

17-6

18

Liquid Sensor Setup

The Liquid Sensor Setup function allows you to enter information about liquid sensors installed in the interstitial
space of double-wall tanks and the sumps of double-wall piping systems, or the oil/water separator sensor. You
must enter data individually for each sensor. The information you enter tells the system the number, location, and
types of sensors installed.

Selecting the Liquid Sensor Setup Function
To select Liquid Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
LIQUID SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Liquid Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SENSOR CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which liquid sense wire positions on a module are connected to liquid sensors.
NOTE: If liquid sensors are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES LIQUID SENSORS
If liquid sensors are installed, the system will recognize the presence and module slot locations of Interstitial
Sensor Interface Modules. The system also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example,
if modules are installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1 and the
module in slot #6 becomes module #2.
As you specify which liquid sense wire positions on a module are connected to liquid sensors, the system
establishes a number for each liquid sensor. For example, if there is a liquid sensor in positions 3 and 5 of module
1, the sensor in position 3 becomes L3 and the sensor in position 5 becomes L5.
To indicate that a liquid sensor position is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position. For
example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X for
that position.

SPECIFYING LIQUID SENSOR POSITIONS
To specify whether the first position is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the
position is connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again
until the correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensor positions. When
you have entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following
message:
SLOT # - X X X X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

18-1

18 Liquid Sensor Setup

Liquid Sensor Location

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SENSOR CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configuration information (sensor positions) for all modules and the system
displays the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.

Liquid Sensor Location
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SENSOR LOCATION
L1:

To enter the location of a liquid sensor, press TANK repeatedly until the sensor you want appears on the second
line of the message (L1, L2, L3, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the location (up to 20 alphanumeric characters)
of the selected sensor. Typical entries would be: INTERSTITIAL TANK 1; SUMP TANK 1, etc. (This information will
appear on sensor status and sensor alarm reports to make it easier to identify the location of alarms.) Press
ENTER to confirm your entry:
L1: (Sensor Location)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Liquid Sensor Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
L1: ENTER SENSOR TYPE
TRI-STATE (SINGLE FLOAT)

If necessary press CHANGE to display additional liquid sensor types (see table below):
Sensor Type Entry
Tri-State (Single Float)

Applicable V-R Sensor
Sump sensor

V-R Part Number
794380-208

Steel Tank sensor

794380-420, -460

Fiberglass Interstitial Float sensor

794390-401, -404, -407, -409

Position-Sensitive sensor

794380-323

Media-Isolated Float sensor

794380-430

Normally Closed

None

None

Dual Float Hydrostatic

Dual Point Hydrostatic sensor

794380-302 (soon to superseded by 794380-303)

Dual Float Discriminating*

Dual Float High Vapor

Interceptor (European - limited to
certain specific Interceptor types)

Discriminating Pan sensor

794380-322

Discriminating Sump sensor

794380-352

Discriminating Pan sensor

794380-322

Discriminating Sump sensor

794380-352

Interceptor sensor

720-000-1000

*For Oil/Water Separator sensors (P/N 794690-XXX) use Dual Float Discriminating for sensor type.

18-2

18 Liquid Sensor Setup

Liquid Sensor Category (RS-232 and Remote Display)

Press ENTER to confirm your choice:
(Sensor Type)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Liquid Sensor Category (RS-232 and Remote Display)
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
L1:(Sensor Location)
CATEGORY : OTHER SENSORS

If necessary, press CHANGE until you see the correct category. Additional category options are:

• ANNULAR SPACE1
• DISPENSER PAN
• MONITOR WELL
• STP SUMP
• PIPING SUMP
When you display the correct category, press ENTER.
1International

installations - Interstitial sensors to be configured under ANNULAR SPACE in the liquid sensor
category. Then upon alarm this sensor can only be cleared through the CONFIRM CLEAR function in the
Diagnostic Mode. This is feature is only available if HRM is enabled (ref. Figure 4-2 on page 4-4).

Setting Up Additional Liquid Sensors
If you have additional liquid sensors to configure, press STEP, if necessary, until you see the ENTER SENSOR
LOCATION message. Press TANK to select another sensor and follow the procedures described above beginning
with the section “Liquid Sensor Location” on page 18-2.
If you have entered setup information for all sensors, press FUNCTION to exit.

18-3

19

Vapor Sensor Setup

The Vapor Sensor Setup function allows you to enter information about vapor sensors installed in vapor monitoring
wells at the site. You must enter data individually for each sensor. The information you enter tells the system the
number, location, and vapor thresholds of installed sensors.

Selecting the Vapor Sensor Setup Function
To select Vapor Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
VAPOR SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Vapor Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SENSOR CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which sensor positions on a module are connected to vapor sensors.
NOTE: If vapor sensors are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES VAPOR SENSORS
If vapor sensors are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of Vapor Sensor
Interface Modules. The system also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if
modules are installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1 and the module
in slot #6 becomes module #2.
As you specify which sensor positions on a module are connected to vapor sensors, the system establishes a
number for each sensor. For example, if there is a vapor sensor in positions 3 and 5 of module 1, the sensor in
position 3 becomes V3 and the sensor in position 5 becomes V5.
To indicate that a vapor sensor position is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position. For
example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X for
that position.

SPECIFYING VAPOR SENSOR POSITIONS
To specify whether the first position is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the
position is connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again
until the correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensor positions. When
you have entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following
message:
SLOT # - X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

19-1

19 Vapor Sensor Setup

Vapor Sensor Location

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SENSOR CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configuration information (sensor positions) for all modules and the system
displays the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.

Vapor Sensor Location
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SENSOR LOCATION
V1:

To enter the sensor location, press TANK repeatedly until the sensor you want appears on the second line of the
message (V1, V2, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the location (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) of the selected
sensor. Typical entries would be: WELL #1, NEW CORNER, etc. (This information appears on sensor status and
sensor alarm reports to make it easier to identify the location of the alarm.) Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
V1: (Sensor Location)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Vapor Threshold
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
V1: (Sensor Location)
SENSOR THRESHOLD: 000000

The SENSOR THRESHOLD message lets you enter vapor levels to identify a leak or serious spillover and to
trigger the vapor alarm. Thresholds are in ohms (Ω) and must be calculated for each vapor sensor according to the
formula described below. Thresholds may be set to account for existing vapor levels as long as these vapors do
not exceed the limits explained below.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
IMPORTANT! A vapor sensor must be operated only in wells where preliminary testing has determined that the soil
is not already contaminated beyond acceptable limits (as defined by applicable regulations) or that contaminated
soil has been remediated and is now clean. A vapor sensor should not be operated in wells where preliminary
testing indicates that the initial vapor sensor resistance exceeds 25k ohms. Vapor sensors must have been
installed in their wells at least 24 hours prior to calculating and entering vapor alarm thresholds.

WARNING

OFF

This system contains electrical voltages that can be lethal.
Electrical shock resulting in serious injury or death could result if incorrect
service procedures are used.
When you perform the following procedure:
1. Read all instructions carefully.
2. Turn Off power to the console.

19-2

19 Vapor Sensor Setup

Vapor Sensor Category

1. Be sure that the Battery-Backup switch is in the On position before proceeding. If the battery is Off when AC
power to the system is turned Off, all previously entered setup data WILL BE LOST!
OFF

2. Turn Off all AC power to the system.
3. In the intrinsically safe area of the monitor, locate the Vapor Sensor Interface Module(s).
4. Measure the resistance across the “V” (vapor) and “G” (ground) terminals for each sensor using an ohmmeter.
5. For each sensor, multiply the measured resistance by 4 to determine the vapor threshold value that you should
enter.
IMPORTANT! Vapor alarm threshold values cannot exceed l00k ohm or be less than 1k ohm. The system will not
accept values outside these limits.

SPECIFYING VAPOR THRESHOLD LEVELS
To enter the vapor threshold for the selected sensor, press CHANGE in response to the SENSOR THRESHOLD
message. Enter the vapor threshold value that you calculated based on the formula described above (between 1k
and 100k ohms). Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
VAPOR THRESHOLD: XXXXXX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Vapor Sensor Category
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
V1: (Sensor Location)
CATEGORY:OTHER SENSORS

If necessary, press CHANGE until you see the correct category then press ENTER. The category options are:

• ANNULAR SPACE
• DISPENSER PAN
• MONITOR WELL
• STP SUMP
• PIPING SUMP
When the correct category displays, press ENTER.

Setting Up Additional Vapor Sensors
If you have additional vapor sensors to configure, press STEP, if necessary, to return to the ENTER SENSOR
LOCATION message. Press TANK to select another sensor and follow the procedures described above, beginning
with the section “Vapor Sensor Location” on page 19-2.
If you have entered setup information for all vapor sensors, press FUNCTION to exit.

19-3

20

Groundwater Sensor Setup

The Groundwater Sensor Setup function allows you to enter information about groundwater sensors installed in
groundwater monitoring wells at the site. You must enter data individually for each sensor. The information you
enter tells the system the number and location of installed sensors.

Selecting the Groundwater Sensor Setup Function
To select Groundwater Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
GROUNDWATER SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Groundwater Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SENSOR CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which sensor positions on a module are connected to groundwater sensors.
NOTE: If groundwater sensors are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES GROUNDWATER SENSORS
If groundwater sensors are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of
Groundwater Sensor Interface Modules. The system also establishes a module number based on the slot location.
For example, if modules are installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1
and the module in slot #6 becomes module #2.
As you specify which sensor positions on a module are connected to groundwater sensors, the system establishes
a number for each sensor. For example, if there is a groundwater sensor in positions 3 and 5 of module 1, the
sensor in position 3 becomes G3 and the sensor in position 5 becomes G5.
To indicate that a groundwater sensor position is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position.
For example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X
for that position.

SPECIFYING GROUNDWATER SENSOR POSITIONS
To specify whether the first position is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the
position is connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again
until the correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensor positions. When
you have entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following
message:
SLOT # - X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

20-1

20 Groundwater Sensor Setup

Groundwater Sensor Location

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SENSOR CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered configuration information (sensor positions) for all modules and the system displays
the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.

Groundwater Sensor Location
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SENSOR LOCATION
G1:

To enter the sensor location, press TANK repeatedly until the sensor you want appears on the second line of the
message (G1, G2, G3, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the location (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) of the
selected sensor. Typical entries are: WELL #1, NEW CORNER, etc. (This information appears on sensor status
and sensor alarm reports to make it easier to identify the location of the alarm.) Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
G1: (Sensor Location)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Groundwater Sensor Category
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
G1: (Sensor Location)
CATEGORY:OTHER SENSORS

If necessary, press CHANGE until you see the correct category. The category options are:

• ANNULAR SPACE

• DISPENSER PAN

• MONITOR WELL

• STP SUMP

• PIPING SUMP
When the correct category displays, press ENTER.

Setting Up Additional Groundwater Sensors
If you have additional sensors to configure, press STEP, if necessary, until you see the ENTER SENSOR
LOCATION message. Press TANK to select another sensor and follow the procedures described above, beginning
with “Groundwater Sensor Location” on page 20-2.
If you have entered setup information for all sensors, press FUNCTION to exit.

20-2

21

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

The 2-Wire C.L. (Current Loop) (Type A) Sensor Setup function allows you to enter information about 2-Wire C.L.
(Type A) Sensors installed at your site. You must enter data individually for each sensor.

Selecting the 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup Function
To select 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
2 WIRE C.L. SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SENSOR CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which sensor positions on a module are connected to 2-Wire C.L. sensors.
NOTE: If 2-Wire C.L. sensors are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES 2-WIRE C.L. SENSORS
If 2-Wire C. L. sensors are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of Type A
Interface Modules. The system also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if
modules are installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1 and the module
in slot #6 becomes module #2.
As you specify which sensor positions on a module are connected to 2-Wire C.L. sensors, the system establishes
a number for each sensor. For example, if there is a 2-Wire C.L. sensor in positions 3 and 5 of module 1, the
sensor in position 3 becomes C3 and the sensor in position 5 becomes C5.
To indicate that a 2-Wire C.L. sensor position is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position. For
example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X for
that position.

SPECIFYING 2-WIRE C.L. SENSOR POSITIONS
To specify whether the first position is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the
position is connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again
until the correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensor positions. When
you have entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following
message:
SLOT # - X X X X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

21-1

21 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Location

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SENSOR CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered configuration information (sensor positions) for all modules and the system displays
the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Location
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SENSOR LOCATION
C1:

To enter the sensor location, press TANK repeatedly until the sensor you want appears on the second line of the
message (C1, C2, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the location (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) of the
selected sensor. Typical entries are: INTERSTITIAL-TANK 1; etc. (This information appears on sensor status and
sensor alarm reports to make it easier to identify the location of the alarm.) Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
C1: (Sensor Location)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
C1: ENTER SENSOR TYPE
DISCRIM INTERSTITIAL

Use this display to identify the selected sensor’s type, so the system can properly interpret and report sensor
information. You can choose DISCRIM INTERSTITIAL or ULTRA 2 for the Sensor Type. DISCRIM INTERSTITIAL
sensors have three sensing states: normal condition, water detection, and fuel detection. ULTRA-2 sensors may
have two sensing states: normal condition and liquid condition.
NOTE: The interstitial sensor for high alcohol applications (Form No. 794380-345) must be set up as
ULTRA 2.
Press STEP to accept DISCRIM INTERSTITIAL. Press CHANGE, then ENTER to accept ULTRA 2, press
CHANGE in response to the ENTER SENSOR TYPE message. Press ENTER to confirm your choice:
ULTRA 2
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

2-Wire C.L. Sensor Category
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
C1: (Sensor Location)
CATEGORY: OTHER SENSORS

21-2

21 2-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

Setting Up Additional 2-Wire C.L. Sensors

If necessary, press CHANGE until you see the correct category. The category options are:

• ANNULAR SPACE •DISPENSER PAN
• MONITOR WELL •STP SUMP
• PIPING SUMP
When you display the correct category, press ENTER.

Setting Up Additional 2-Wire C.L. Sensors
If you have additional sensors to configure, press STEP until you see the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.
Press TANK to select another sensor and follow the procedures described above, beginning with“2-Wire C.L.
Sensor Location” on page 21-2.
If you have entered setup information for all sensors, press FUNCTION to exit.

21-3

22

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

The 3-Wire C.L. (Current Loop) (Type B) Sensor Setup function allows you to enter information about dispenser
pan and containment sump sensors installed at the site. You must enter data individually for each sensor. The
information you enter tells the system the number and location of installed sensors.

Selecting the 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup Function
To select 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
3 WIRE C.L. SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SENSOR CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which sensor positions on a module are connected to 3-Wire C.L. sensors.
NOTE: If dispenser pan and containment sump sensors are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES 3-WIRE C.L. SENSORS
If dispenser pan and containment sump sensors are installed, the system will recognize the presence and module
slot locations of Type B Interface Modules. The system also establishes a module number based on the slot
location. For example, if modules are installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes
module #1 and the module in slot #6 becomes module #2.
As you specify which positions on a module are connected to 3-Wire C.L. sensors, the system establishes a
number for each sensor. For example, if there is a sensor in positions 3 and 5 of module 1, the sensor in position 3
becomes H3 and the sensor in position 5 becomes H5.
To indicate that a sensor position is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position. For example, if
the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X for that position.

SPECIFYING 3-WIRE C.L. SENSOR POSITIONS
To indicate whether position 1 is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the position is
connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again until the
correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensor positions. When you have
entered a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays the following message:
SLOT # - X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SENSOR CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each

22-1

22 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Location

module until you have entered the configuration information (sensor positions) for all modules and the system
displays the ENTER SENSOR LOCATION message.

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Location
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SENSOR LOCATION
H1:

To enter the sensor location, press TANK repeatedly until the sensor you want appears on the second line of the
message (H1, H2, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the sensor location (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) of the
selected sensor. A typical entry is: DISPENSER PAN PUMP, etc. (This information appears on sensor status and
sensor alarm reports to make it easier to identify the location of the alarm.) Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
H1: (Sensor Location)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Mode
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
H1: ENTER SENSOR MODE
STANDARD

Use this display to identify the selected sensor’s mode, so the system can properly interpret and report sensor
information. You can choose Standard mode or High Vapor mode. In Standard mode, the sensor alarms when it
senses any hydrocarbon, liquid, or vapor along the length of the sensor. In High Vapor mode the sensor alarms
only if it detects both liquid hydrocarbon and an extremely high hydrocarbon vapor. This mode is recommended
ONLY if the sensor has recently detected a leak and hydrocarbon residue may still be on the sensing element.
To choose Standard mode, press STEP. (The system displays the CATEGORY message.)
To choose High Vapor, press CHANGE in response to the ENTER SENSOR MODE message. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice:
H1: (Sensor Mode)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

3-Wire C.L. Sensor Category
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
H1: (Sensor Location)
CATEGORY:OTHER SENSORS

If necessary, press CHANGE until you see the correct category. The category options are:

22-2

22 3-Wire C.L. Sensor Setup

Setting Up Additional 3-Wire C.L. Sensors

• ANNULAR SPACE •DISPENSER PAN
• MONITOR WELL •STP SUMP
• PIPING SUMP
When the correct category displays, press ENTER.

Setting Up Additional 3-Wire C.L. Sensors
If you have additional sensors to configure, press STEP, if necessary until you see the ENTER SENSOR
LOCATION message. Press TANK to select another sensor and follow the procedures described in the preceding
sections, beginning with “3-Wire C.L. Sensor Location” on page 22-2.
If you have entered setup information for all sensors, press FUNCTION to exit.

22-3

23

External Input Setup

Input devices can be connected to the system monitor via Input/Output (I/O) Combination Interface Modules. You
must enter data individually for each input device. The information you enter tells the system the number, location,
type, and name of installed input devices.

Selecting the External Input Setup Function
To select External Input Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
EXTERNAL INPUT SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

External Input Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
INPUT CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT # - X X

Use this display to tell the system which input positions on a module are connected to external devices.
NOTE: If external devices are not installed, this function is not available.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES INPUT DEVICES
If input devices are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of I/O Combination
Interface Modules. It also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if modules are
installed in slots #3 and #6, the module in slot #3 automatically becomes module #1 and the module in slot #6
becomes module #2.
As you specify which input positions on a module are connected to external devices, the system establishes a
number for each input position. For example, if an external device is connected to positions 1 and 2 of module 1,
input position 1 becomes I1 and input position 2 becomes I2.
To indicate that an input position on the module is connected, choose the number corresponding to that position.
For example, if the position is 3, choose 3 for the position. To indicate that a position is not connected, choose X
for that position.

SPECIFYING INPUT POSITIONS
To indicate whether position 1 is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the position is
connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again until the
correct choice appears. When you have entered a choice for both positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry:
SLOT # - X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the INPUT CONFIG
message for the next module.Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each

23-1

23 External Input Setup

External Input Name

module until you have entered configuration information (input positions) for all modules and the system displays
the ENTER INPUT NAME message.

External Input Name
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER INPUT NAME
I1:

To enter the name of an external device, press TANK repeatedly until the input position that is connected to the
external device you want appears on the second line of the message (I1, I2, etc.). Press CHANGE and enter the
name (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) of the selected device. Typical entries are: GENERATOR 1, BURGLAR
ALM, DCD input, etc. (This information appears on reports to make it easier to identify the input. The name
appears in the message when selecting Output Relay Assignments.) Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
I1: (Input Name)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

External Input Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
I1: EXTERNAL INPUT TYPE
STANDARD

Use this display to define the type of input—Standard, Generator, Pump Sense, or Standard ACK—that is
connected to the selected input location:

• Choose Standard for any input device connected for the purpose of using the system’s reporting, alarm, and
data communications features

• Choose Generator for applications where you monitor fuel tank(s) supplying an emergency generator and you
receive GENERATOR ON and OFF signals from the generator. The system runs a continuous leak test in the
generator’s tank(s) until the generator turns On. When the generator shuts Off, the system returns to its Leak
Test mode. GENERATOR ON and GENERATOR OFF messages are printed whenever the generator turns on
and off.

• Choose Pump Sense when the input is used to indicate the On/Off state of the pump.
• Choose Standard ACK when using an eternal input (e.g., remote pushbutton) as an ALARM/TEST key.
Press CHANGE until the correct choice appears then press ENTER to confirm your choice:
I1: (Input Type)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

23-2

23 External Input Setup

Switch Orientation

Switch Orientation
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
I1: SELECT ORIENTATION
NORMALLY OPEN

You must identify the input switch type as either normally open or normally closed so the system properly
recognizes an ON or OFF condition. To choose Normally Open, press STEP. To choose Normally Closed, press
CHANGE and press ENTER to confirm your choice:
NORMALLY CLOSED
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If you chose Standard or Standard ACK for the External Input Type, you are finished entering setup data for the
selected input position. To enter setup information for additional input positions, press STEP to return to the
ENTER INPUT NAME message. Press TANK to choose another input. To exit the function, press FUNCTION.
If you chose Generator or Pump Sense for the External Input Type, press STEP to continue. Refer to the section
below that corresponds to the input type you chose. (The system displays the SELECT TANK message for the
Input Type you selected.)

External Input Emergency Generator Data
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
I1: SELECT TANK
TANK #: ALL TANK

NOTE: This message appears only if you chose GENERATOR for the External Input Type.
You must identify which tanks supply fuel to the generator, so that the system will conduct a continuous leak test in
these tanks while the generator is off. If all tanks connected to the system supply fuel to the generator wired to this
input, select All Tanks. If only one or some of the tanks connected to the system supply fuel to this generator, enter
the individual tank numbers.
If you want to choose All Tanks, do nothing. If you want to enter tank numbers, press CHANGE. Enter the tank
numbers and press ENTER to confirm your entry:
TANK #: X, X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

If you have additional input positions to configure, refer to the section below entitled “Setting Up Additional Inputs”
on page 23-4.
If you have entered setup information for all input positions, press FUNCTION to exit.

Pump Sense Setup Data
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
I1: SELECT TANK
NONE

23-3

23 External Input Setup

Setting Up Additional Inputs

NOTE: This message appears only if you chose Pump Sense for the External Input Type.
You must identify the tank to which this Pump Sense input is assigned.
To enter the tank number, press CHANGE until the desired Tank number is displayed. Press ENTER to confirm
your entry:
TANK #: (Product Label)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

SELECTING A DISPENSE MODE
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: ENTER DISPENSE MODE
XXXXXXXXX

This entry asks you to select the dispense mode. You can select between:

• STANDARD - Only one pump feeds the line.
• MANIFOLDED: ALTERNATE1 - The pump will run in the tank with the greatest inventory volume.
• MANIFOLDED: SEQUENTIAL1 - The tanks are pumped low one at a time. When the tank’s volume drops
below the entered Pump Threshold percentage, pumping will switch over immediately to the next available tank
in the line manifolded set. Pumping will continue from the current tank for another 10 seconds to avoid a
disruption in dispensing during the switch over. (see “Pump Threshold” on page 7-26).

• MANIFOLDED: ALL PUMPS - All pumps on the line are run.
Press CHANGE until your choice appears then press ENTER to continue.

Setting Up Additional Inputs
If you have additional input positions to configure, press STEP. The system returns to the ENTER INPUT NAME
message. Press TANK to select another input position and follow the procedures described in the preceding
sections, beginning with “External Input Name” on page 23-2.
If you have entered setup information for all input positions, press FUNCTION to exit.

1. To prevent backfilling, the level of all tanks connected to the line will be monitored. If the level of any tank
exceeds 95% of the Max or Label Volume limit (see “Max or Label Vol” on page 7-15), the pump for that
tank will also be turned on during dispensing. The state of the pump that was already ON will not be
changed.

23-4

24

Output Relay Setup

Output Relays allow you to assign alarm limits, line leak alarms, sensor alarms, and inputs from external devices to
specific relays. Signals from an alarm limit or device triggers the Output Relay assigned to it. You must enter data
individually for each Output Relay. The data you enter tells the system the number, location, and name of Output
Relays installed.
NOTE: If output relay modules are not installed, this function is not available.

Selecting the Output Relay Setup Function
To select Output Relay Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Relay Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
RELAY CONFIG - MODULE 1
SLOT #: X X X X

Use this display to tell the system which relay positions on a module are connected to external devices.

HOW THE SYSTEM CONFIGURES OUTPUT RELAYS
If output relay modules are installed, the system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of each one.
The system also establishes a module number based on the slot location. For example, if modules are installed in
slots #9 and #13, the module in slot #9 automatically becomes module #1 and the module in slot #13 becomes
module #2.
As you tell the system which relay positions on a module are connected to external devices, the system establishes
a number for each relay. For example, if there are relays in positions 2 and 4 of module 1, the relay in position 2
becomes R2 and the relay in position 4 become R4.
To indicate that one of the relay positions on the module is connected to an external device, choose the number
corresponding to that position. There can be up to four relay positions for 4-Relay Modules and up to two positions
for I/O Combo Modules. For example, if the position is two, choose “2” for the position. To indicate that a position
is not connected to an external device, choose X for that position.

SPECIFYING OUTPUT RELAY POSITIONS
To specify whether position 1 is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the position is
connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again until the
correct choice appears. Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all positions. When you have entered
a choice for all positions, press ENTER to confirm your entry:
SLOT #: X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

24-1

24 Output Relay Setup

Relay Designation

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the RELAY CONFIG
message for the next module. Up to 8 modules may be installed. Repeat the steps described above for each
module until you have entered the configuration information (relay positions) for all modules and the system
displays the ENTER RELAY DESIGNATION message.

Relay Designation
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER RELAY DESIGNATION
R1:

Enter the name of the device connected to the selected output relay. Typical names are: OVERFILL ALARM;
AUTO DIALER; etc. (This name appears on reports to make it easier to identify the external device. The name also
appears on the display when in-tank or sensor alarms and external inputs are assigned to the relay).
To enter a designation for the selected relay, press CHANGE and enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Press
ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
R1: (Name)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Selecting Relay Type
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: SELECT RELAY TYPE
STANDARD

From this display, press CHANGE to display one of four output relay types:

• STANDARD - The On/Off state is determined by assigned alarms/warnings.
• PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT - Responds to a pump request received from an assigned Pump Sense module or
Line Leak module.

• MOMENTARY - The On/Off state is determined by assigned alarms/warnings. However, relay returns to the
inactive state after the ALARM/TEST key is pressed to acknowledge the alarm.

• PUMP COMM CONTROL - Select this relay type only when a set of line manifolded tanks are using Red Jacket
IQ Controllers, and you want to run PLLD/WPLLD precision line leak tests. After selecting this relay type, when
one IQ controlled pump of a manifolded set is turned On for line leak testing, the relay will activate, blocking
communication with the second IQ controlled pump (giving the console total control of the pumps) until the
precision test is complete.
When the desired relay type appears on the display, press ENTER to confirm your choice.
If you select STANDARD or MOMENTARY, the display reads:
R X:SELECT ORIENTATION
NORMALLY OPEN

To accept normally open (relay de-energized when alarm is inactive), press STEP. Press CHANGE to display
normally closed (relay energized when alarm is inactive), then ENTER to accept.

24-2

24 Output Relay Setup

Assignment Method

If you select PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT or PUMP COMM CONTROL relay types, you will prompted to specify a
tank number.
Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

or

PUMP COMM CONTROL
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
R1: SELECT TANK
NONE

For Pump Control Output relay selection, press CHANGE and enter the tank number of the assigned Pump Sense
module or Line Leak module.
For Pump Comm Control relay selection, press CHANGE and enter the number of the tank in the manifolded set
which is assigned to the PLLD or WPLLD module.
In either case, press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
TANK #: X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Assignment Method
This function allows you to assign alarms and external inputs for each relay (except Pump Comm Control relay). For
the selected relay, you will first specify whether you want to assign an available alarm type (e.g., In-Tank, Liquid
Sensor, etc.) or external input to that relay by choosing Yes or No for that type of alarm or input. For all alarms
except System, if you choose Yes, you must then specify the method of assignment (none, all, or single) for each
alarm condition.
NOTE: You may assign more than one in-tank alarm, sensor alarm, and external input to a relay, and you may assign
any in-tank alarm, sensor alarm, and external input to more than one relay.
As you step through possible relay assignments, the system automatically displays all in-tank alarms, sensor
alarms, line leak alarms and external inputs that have been configured in the system. If no other sensors or inputs
are configured, the system returns to the RELAY DESIGNATION message. Refer to the section entitled “Setting
Up Additional Relays” on page 24-8.)

IN-TANK ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1:(Name)
IN-TANK ALARMS: NO

If you do not want to assign In-Tank Alarms to the relay displayed in the first line of the IN- TANK ALARMS
message, press STEP. (The system displays the next available alarm or input assignment group.
To assign In-Tank Alarms to the selected relay, press CHANGE in response to the IN-TANK ALARMS: NO
message. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
IN-TANK ALARMS: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

24-3

24 Output Relay Setup

Assignment Method

Press STEP to display the message:
R1: IN-TANK ALARMS
LEAK: NO TANKS

This message shows the first kind of alarm condition for In-Tank Alarms: LEAK. You must tell the system whether to
assign the displayed alarm condition (in this case In-Tank Leak Alarms) to the selected relay for No Tanks, All
Tanks, or Single Tanks. To choose No Tanks, press STEP. (The system displays the next In-Tank Alarm condition:
HIGH WATER.)
To choose All Tanks, press CHANGE once. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
LEAK: ALL TANKS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to specify the assignment method for the next In-Tank Alarm condition (HIGH WATER).
To choose Single Tanks, press CHANGE twice in response to the LEAK: NO TANKS message. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice. The system displays:
LEAK: SINGLE TANK
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message: The system displays:
R1: (Name)
T1 LEAK: NO

Use the above message to specify the tank number(s) that you want to assign to the relay. If you do not want to
assign the tank number shown (T1, T2, etc.), press TANK until you see the tank number that you want to assign to
the relay. When the correct tank number appears, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system confirms your
entry (for T1) with the message:
R1: T1 LEAK: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Continue to press TANK to select additional tanks. For example, pressing TANK once would display the following
message:
R1: (Name)
T2 LEAK: NO

Repeat the steps described above to assign additional tanks to the relay. When you have assigned all the tanks
you want to the relay, press STEP. The system displays the assignment method message for the next In-Tank Alarm
condition:
R1: IN-TANK ALARMS
HIGH WATER: NO TANKS

Repeat the procedures described for the LEAK alarm condition until you have specified an assignment method for
the all remaining In-Tank Alarm conditions (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).
Press TANK/SENSOR to select additional tanks for the In-Tank Leak alarm. When you have specified all tanks for
the first In-Tank alarm, press STEP to advance to the next alarm group. Repeat the steps described above to
assign tanks for each In-Tank alarm. After you have specified tanks for each In-Tank alarm condition, press STEP to
advance to the next alarm group.

24-4

24 Output Relay Setup

Assignment Method

REMAINING ALARM GROUPS
Continue to step through all of the available alarm groups, selecting the various alarms from the groups that you
want to assign to the selected relay (R1, R2, etc.). The procedure for bypassing or selecting alarms from each
group and then assigning them to a device in that group is the same as discussed for In-Tank alarms above.
The remaining alarm groups/alarms are shown below. Only installed components will display, so some of the alarm
groups may not appear.

LIQUID SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
LIQUID SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Liquid Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

VAPOR SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
VAPOR SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Vapor Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

EXTERNAL INPUTS ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
EXTERNAL INPUTS: NO

Select the External Inputs Alarm (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

LINE LEAK ALARMS (VLLD)
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
LINE LEAK ALARMS: NO

Select Volumetric Line Leak Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

GROUNDWATER SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
GROUNDWATER ALMS: NO

Select Groundwater Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

24-5

24 Output Relay Setup

Assignment Method

2 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
2 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select 2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

3 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
3 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select 3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

POWER SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
POWER SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select Power Side DIM Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

RECONCILIATION ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
RECONCILIATION ALM: NO

Select Reconciliation Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (PLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
PRESSURE LINE LEAK: NO

Select Pressure Line Leak Detector Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

WIRELESS PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (WPLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
WPLLD LINE LEAK: NO

Select WPLLD Line Leak Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

24-6

24 Output Relay Setup

Assignment Method

COMMUNICATION SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
COMM SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select Communication Bay DIM Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

SMART SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
PUMP RLY MON ALMS: NO

Select Smart Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

PUMP RELAY MONITOR ALARM
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Name)
PUMP ALARM: NO

Select Pump Relay Monitor Alarm (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).
When you have specified the assignment method for each Pump Relay Monitor Alarm condition, press STEP. If no
other sensor or inputs are configured, the system returns to the IN-TANK ALARMS message.

VMCI DISPENSER INTERFACE ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Destination)
VMCI ALARM: NO

Select the VMCI Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

VMC ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
R1: (Destination)
VMC ALARM: NO

Select the VMC Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

24-7

24 Output Relay Setup

Setting Up Additional Relays

Setting Up Additional Relays
After setting up the data for the selected relay (R1, R2, etc.), press STEP, if necessary, until the system returns to
the message:
ENTER RELAY DESIGNATION
R1:

Press TANK/SENSOR to choose another relay. Set up the relay by repeating the procedures you followed for the
previous relay. Refer to the previous sections beginning with “Relay Designation” on page 24-2. If you have
entered setup data for all relays, press FUNCTION to exit.

24-8

25

Line Disable Setup

The Line Disable Setup Function allows you designate alarm limits, line leak alarms, sensor alarms, and inputs from
external devices to shut down any line.
Line Disable works with any of the three line leak detection systems; Pressurized Line Leak (PLLD), Wireless
Pressurized Line Leak (WPLLD), or Volumetric Line Leak (VLLD).

Selecting the PLLD, WPLLD, or VLLD Line Disable Setup Function
Select the Line Disable Setup for the type(s) of leak detection system at your site (PLLD, WPLLD or VLLD).
Press FUNCTION until you see the message:
XXXXX LINE DISABLE SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

ALARM ASSIGNMENT NOTES
As you step through the Line Disable Setup’s steps, the system automatically displays the in-tank alarms, sensor
alarms, and external inputs from which you can choose to shut down a line. If a type of alarm is listed in these
instructions, but does not appear on your screen, that alarm is not available on your system. Refer to the sections
listed below that correspond to the alarm types displayed on your screen.
You may assign more than one in-tank alarm, sensor alarm, and external input to a line, and you may assign any intank alarm, sensor alarm, and external input to more than one line.
Whenever the prefix “Q” appears in the display, it stands for the selected line in the PLLD system, “W” stands for
the selected line in the WPLLD system and “P” stands for the selected line in the VLLD system.

In-Tank Alarms
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
IN-TANK ALARMS: NO

If you do not want to assign In-Tank Alarms to the line displayed in the IN- TANK ALARMS message, press STEP.
(The system displays the next available alarm or input assignment group. Refer to the section below corresponding
to the next available alarm or input group. If no other sensor or inputs are configured, the system returns to the INTANK ALARMS message. Refer to the section entitled “Setting Up Additional Disables” on page 25-6.)
To assign In-Tank Alarms to the selected line, press CHANGE, then ENTER to confirm your choice:
IN-TANK ALARMS: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
Q1: IN-TANK ALARMS
LEAK: NO TANKS

25-1

25 Line Disable Setup

In-Tank Alarms

This message shows the first kind of alarm condition for In-Tank Alarms: LEAK. You must tell the system whether to
assign the displayed alarm condition (in this case In-Tank Leak Alarms) to the selected line for No Tanks, All Tanks,
or Single Tanks. To choose No Tanks, press STEP. (The system displays the next In-Tank Alarm condition: HIGH
WATER.)
To choose All Tanks, press CHANGE once. Press ENTER to confirm your choice. The system displays:
LEAK: ALL TANKS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to specify the assignment method for the next In-Tank Alarm condition (HIGH WATER).
To choose Single Tanks, press CHANGE twice in response to the LEAK: NO TANKS message. Press ENTER to
confirm your choice. The system displays:
LEAKS: SINGLE TANKS
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to display the message:
Q1: (Name)
T1 LEAK: NO

Use this display to specify the tank number(s) that you want to assign to the line. If you do not want to assign the
tank number shown (T1, T2, etc.), press TANK until you see the tank number that you want to assign to the line.
When the correct tank number appears, press CHANGE and press ENTER. The system confirms your entry (for
T1) with the message:
Q1: T1 LEAK: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Continue to press TANK to select additional tanks. For example, pressing TANK once would display the following
message:
Q1: (Name)
T2 LEAK: NO

Repeat the steps described above to assign additional tanks to the line. When you have assigned all the tanks you
want to the line, press STEP. The system displays the assignment method message for the next In-Tank Alarm
condition:
Q1: IN TANK ALARMS
HIGH WATER: NO TANKS

Repeat the procedures described for the LEAK alarm condition until you have specified an assignment method for
all remaining In-Tank Alarm conditions (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).
When you have specified the assignment method for each In-Tank Alarm condition, press STEP. The system
displays the next available alarm or input assignment group.

REMAINING ALARM GROUPS
Continue to step through all of the available alarm groups, selecting the various alarms from the groups that you
want to have disable the selected line (Q1, Q2, etc.). The procedure for bypassing or selecting alarms from each
group and then assigning them to a device in that group is the same as discussed for In-Tank alarms above.
The remaining alarm groups/alarms are shown below. Only installed components will display, so some of the alarm
groups may not appear.

25-2

25 Line Disable Setup

In-Tank Alarms

LIQUID SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
LIQUID SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Liquid Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

VAPOR SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
VAPOR SENSOR ALMS: NO

Select the Vapor Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

EXTERNAL INPUT ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
EXTERNAL INPUTS: NO

Select the External Inputs Alarm (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

LINE LEAK ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
LINE LEAK ALARMS: NO

Select Line Leak (Volumetric) Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

GROUNDWATER SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
GROUNDWATER ALMS: NO

Select Groundwater Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

2 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
2 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select 2 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

25-3

25 Line Disable Setup

In-Tank Alarms

3 WIRE C.L. SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
3 WIRE CL ALARMS: NO

Select 3 Wire C.L. Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

POWER SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
POWER SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select Power Side DIM Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

RECONCILIATION ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
RECONCILIATION ALM: NO

Select Reconciliation Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (PLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
PRESSURE LINE LEAK: NO

Select Pressure Line Leak Detector Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

• OPEN ALARM*
• HANDLE ALRM*
• LN EQ FAULT*
*These are the only PLLD alarms that can disable a PLLD line.

WIRELESS PRESSURE LINE LEAK DETECTOR (WPLLD) ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
WPLLD LINE LEAK: NO

Select WPLLD Line Leak Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

• COMM ALARM*

• HANDLE ALRM*

• LN EQ FAULT*
*These are the only WPLLD alarms that can disable a WPLLD line.

25-4

25 Line Disable Setup

In-Tank Alarms

COMMUNICATION SIDE DIM ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
COMM SIDE DIM ALM: NO

Select Communication Bay DIM Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

SMART SENSOR ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
SMART SENSOR ALM: NO

Select Smart Sensor Alarms (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

PUMP RELAY MONITOR ALARM
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Name)
PUMP RLY MON ALMS: NO

Select Pump Relay Monitor Alarm (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).
When you have specified the assignment method for each Pump Relay Monitor Alarm condition, press STEP. If no
other sensor or inputs are configured, the system returns to the IN-TANK ALARMS message.

VMCI DISPENSER INTERFACE ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Destination)
VMCI ALARM: NO

Select the VMCI Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

VMC ALARMS
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
Q1: (Destination)
VMC ALARM: NO

Select the VMC Alarms to send (ref. Alarm List in Section 6, Table 6-2).

25-5

25 Line Disable Setup

Setting Up Additional Disables

Setting Up Additional Disables
After setting up the data for the selected line (e.g., Q1), press STEP, if necessary, until the system returns to the
message:
Q1: (Name)
IN-TANK ALARMS: NO

Press TANK to choose another line. Set up the line by repeating the procedures you followed for the previous line.
Refer to the previous sections beginning with “Alarm Assignment Notes” on page 25-1 for instructions.
If you have entered setup data for all lines, press FUNCTION to exit.

25-6

26

Smart Sensor Setup

Your console may have Smart Sensors installed. Once a Smart Sensor is configured, the system reads the
sensor’s feature set and programming options. After configuring each Smart Sensor, you should printout the Smart
Sensor Setup before attempting to program the sensor.
NOTE: If Smart Sensor modules are not installed, this function is not available.

Selecting the Smart Sensor Setup Function
To select Smart Sensor Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
SMART SENSOR SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Sensor Configuration
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
SS CONFIG - MODULE n
SLOT #: X X X X X X X X

When Smart Sensor Interface Modules (8 inputs) or Smart Sensor / Press Modules (7 inputs) are installed, the
system recognizes the presence and module slot locations of each one. The system also designates the module
number (n) based on the slot location. In this display you tell the system which positions on the module have been
connected to sensors.
As you tell the system which sensor positions on a module are connected, the system establishes a number for
each sensor. For example, if there are sensors connected to positions 2 and 4 of module 1, the sensor in position
2 becomes s2 and the sensor in position 4 becomes s4.
To specify whether position 1 is connected, press CHANGE until the correct choice appears (1 if the position is
connected, X if it is not). Press the Right Arrow key to move to position 2 and press CHANGE again until the
correct choice appears (2). Repeat these steps until you have correctly specified all sensors connected to this
Smart Sensor module. Press ENTER to confirm your entry:
SLOT #: X X X X X X X X
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP. If more than one module is installed, the system automatically advances to the SS CONFIG message
for the next module. Up to 40 smart sensors can be monitored by the console.
NOTE: At least one Smart Sensor / Press module is required with Vac Sensors. You can use either additional
Smart Sensor / Press Modules or 8-input Smart Sensor Interface Modules if more than 7 Vac Sensors are
installed.
Repeat the steps described above for each module until you have entered the configuration information (sensor
positions) for all modules and the system displays the ENTER SMARTSENSOR LABEL message.
When you have finished configuring all Smart Sensors, press the PRINT key to printout a copy of each sensors
feature set and programming options (see example printout below).

26-1

26 Smart Sensor Setup

Smart Sensor Label

SMARTSENSOR SETUP
---------------------s 1:(label)
CATEGORY MAG SENSOR
ALM UPGRADE DELAY:
PROGRAMMABLE
MIN THRESHOLD
MAX THRESHOLD
Alarm Setup Format
Alarm Name
Alarm Parameter
Alarm is programmable (yes/no)
Alarm is upgradeable (yes/no)

72
YES
0.0
24.0

FUEL ALARM
FUEL HT
PROGRAMMABLE
UPGRADE
WATER WARNING
WATER HT
PROGRAMMABLE
UPGRADE

For all warnings that are upgradeable, this is the time
(in hours) all uncleared warnings will delay upgrading
to alarms. Range 0 - 9999 hours maximum. Can be
programmed only if the device is factory coded
programmable (in this example yes). If set to 0, the
upgrade option is disabled.
device limits - non programmable

>

2.0
NO
NO

> symbol, i.e., fuel warn posted when height is
greater than 2 inches

>

2.0
YES
YES

Alarm threshold - default water warn height limit
in inches.

TEMPERATURE WARNING
FLUID TEMP
<
PROGRAMMABLE
UPGRADE

-12.5
YES
NO

Default fluid temp in °F. range is -40 to 120°F
< symbol, i.e., temp warning posted
when temp is less than -12.5 degrees.

Smart Sensor Label
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ENTER SMARTSENSOR LABEL
s 1:

Enter a name for the sensor connected to the selected Smart Sensor connector. Press CHANGE and enter up to
20 alphanumeric characters. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system displays:
s 1: (Name)
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

Selecting Sensor Category
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
s 1: SELECT SS CATEGORY
MAG SENSOR

If necessary, press CHANGE until the desired category appears then press ENTER to confirm your choice.

• Air Flow Meter

26-2

26 Smart Sensor Setup

Mag Sensor Setup

• Vapor Pressure
• Mag Sensor
• Vac Sensor
• ATMP Sensor (NOTE: The atmospheric pressure [ATMP] sensor is resident in the Smart Sensor / Press
Module. One ATMP sensor is required with Vac Sensor systems per site. You only need to configure the ATMP
sensor, there is no setup [other than assigning a label]. A Setup Data Warning will be posted for all Vac Sensors
if an ATMP sensor is not present and configured)

• Unknown

Mag Sensor Setup
If the Mag Sump Sensor you installed has NO programmable features (i.e., alarm upgrade delay, water warning
height, or water alarm height), you will not be able to enter Mag Sensor Setup after entering Smart Sensor label
and Sensor Category.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
s 1: MAG SENSOR SETUP
PRESS 

Press ENTER:
s 1: (Name)
ALM UPGRADE DELAY: XXXX

This display appears if the alarm upgrade delay has been factory set to programmable. This is the time in hours
that all uncleared warnings will delay before upgrading to alarms. Also, this upgrade only applies to Smart Sensor
warnings that have been factory set to upgrade.
If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the number of hours (up to 9999) to delay upgrades. Entering 0 disables
the Alarm Upgrade Delay feature. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.:
s 1: WATER WARNING
>
WATER HT

0002.0

This display appears only if the Water Warning has been factory set to programmable. This is the height in inches
(or mm if metric units selected) at which the Water Warning will activate. Refer to your Smart Sensor setup
printout’s Min/Max Thresholds for the permissible range within which to select this value.
If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the Water Warning height. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.:
s 1: WATER ALARM
>
WATER HT

0005.0

This display appears only if the Water Alarm has been factory set to programmable. This is the height in inches (or
mm if metric units selected) at which the Water Alarm will activate. Refer to your Smart Sensor Setup printout’s
Min/Max Thresholds for the permissible range within which to select this value.
If necessary, press CHANGE and enter the Water Alarm height. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.

26-3

26 Smart Sensor Setup

Vac Sensor Setup

Vac Sensor Setup
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
s 1: VAC SENSOR SETUP
PRESS 

Press ENTER:
s 1: SELECT PUMP #
NONE

You must select the pump that will provide the source of vacuum for this Vac Sensor or a Setup Data Warning will
be posted for this Vac Sensor. If necessary, press CHANGE until the correct pump’s control device displays [QX
(PLLD), WX (WPLLD), or RX (Output Relay)]. NOTE: an Output Relay must be set to Pump Control Output to be
assigned as a pump. If the selected pump output relay is not assigned to a pump sense device, a Setup Data
Warning for this Vac Sensor will be posted.
Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.:
s 1: (Vacuum Label)
501
VOLUME:

Enter the volume in gallons of the interstitial space being monitored by the Vac Sensor. The permitted range is 1 to
500 gallons. Default is 501. A Setup Data Warning alarm will activate if a volume between 1 and 500 is not
entered.
Press CHANGE and enter the interstitial space volume. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.:
s 1: (Vacuum Label)
RELIEF VALVE: NO

Steel Tank
If this Vac Sensor is monitoring a steel tank’s interstitial space, a relief valve is usually not needed. Press STEP
to accept the default NO. Press Tank/Sensor to setup another Vac Sensor.
Fiberglass Tank
If this Vac Sensor is monitoring a fiberglass tank’s interstitial space, a relief valve is required to prevent excess
vacuum from damaging the tank. Press CHANGE and select YES. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.:
s 1: (Vacuum Label)
RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE: -9.0

Enter the pressure at which the installed Relief Valve is rated to open (the vent pressure is stamped on the
body of the V-R Relief Valve). The permitted range is -5 to -9 psi. Default vent pressure is -9. Press ENTER to
confirm your entry. Press Tank/Sensor to setup another Vac Sensor.

26-4

27

VMC Setup

The Vapor Monitoring Controller (VMC) Setup function allows you to monitor a series of up to 18 dispenser
mounted, Gilbarco Vapor Monitor Controllers via an installed VMCI comm board.The VMCI board will poll each
VMC on the bus, and periodically upload the VMC information back to the TLS. The TLS supports the installation
of only 1 VMCI comm board. Additional VMCI boards will cause Setup Data Warnings. A VMCI board must be
installed in the TLS for the VMC Setup function to appear. NOTE: VMC setup will not be saved in E2. On cold
boot, the VMC serial numbers entered during setup will have to be reentered following the setup procedure below.

Selecting the VMC Setup Function
To enter VMC Setup, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
VMC SETUP
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue. Press PRINT to printout current VMC setup
(see example at right).

VMC SETUP
- - - - - - - - - - VMC
S/N
1
005830
2
005813
3
002209

Add a VMC Serial Number

consoles\vmcsetup.eps

If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ADD VMC SERIAL NUMBER
PRESS 

Press ENTER.
ADD VMC SERIAL NUMBER
x 1:

Enter the serial number of the displayed VMC or press TANK repeatedly until the desired VMC displays. Press
CHANGE and enter the VMC’s serial number. Press ENTER to confirm your entry. Press STEP to continue.

Edit a VMC Serial Number
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
EDIT VMC SERIAL NUMBER
PRESS 

Press ENTER. If necessary, press TANK repeatedly until the desired VMC displays.
EDIT VMC SERIAL NUMBER
x 1: 111111

Press CHANGE and enter the revised serial number of the displayed VMC. Press ENTER to confirm your entry.
Press STEP to continue.

27-1

27 VMC Setup

Remove a VMC Serial Number

Remove a VMC Serial Number
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
REMOVE VMC SERIAL NUMBER
PRESS 

Press ENTER. If necessary, press TANK repeatedly until the desired VMC displays.
x 1: 111111
REMOVE VMC: NO

Press CHANGE.
x 1: 111111
REMOVE VMC: YES

Press ENTER to confirm..
REMOVE VMC: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP:
REMOVE VMC: 111111
ARE YOU SURE? NO

Press CHANGE.
REMOVE VMC: 111111
ARE YOU SURE? YES

Press STEP:
REMOVE VMC SERIAL NUMBER
PRESS 

27-2

28

Archive Utility

The Archive Utility allows you to save system setup data to the EEPROM (E2) chip and later restore this saved
setup data should a power interruption occur while the battery backup is OFF. Because system setup data is not
automatically saved, you have more flexibility when using different setup conditions. Another feature the Archive
Utility provides you is the ability to clear current system setup data and replace it with system setup data you
stored previously in the E2 chip.
AccuChart users should note that you archive system setup data only in the E2 chip. If AccuChart is complete, the
final calibration values are automatically stored in the E2 chip and there will be no need to recalibrate the tank.
Incomplete CSLD data, AccuChart data, BIR historical data, etc., are all stored in various RAM locations within the
console, not in the E2 chip. When turned ON, the Battery Backup feature will protect these data in the event of a
power loss to the console. But should you lose AC power to the console while the Battery Backup switch is OFF,
all of this important historical data will be lost (e.g., AccuChart calibration will have to restart and won’t be
complete for 56 days).
Therefore, if you plan to replace the ECPU board or the battery, you should consider downloading all data (setup
and historical) to a computer using Veeder-Root’s Inform software (Part No. 848900-X0X).
NOTE: Setup data archived in the E2 chip is not an option to turning the Backup Battery ON. The Backup Battery
switch should always be set to the ON position.

Accessing the Archive Utility Function
To select the Archive Utility, press FUNCTION until you see the message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.
The system also provides interactive access to Archive Utility functions by prompting you to restore previously
saved setup data upon power up, if the battery switch is set to OFF.
For example, if you power up the system while the battery switch is set to OFF, and setup data was previously
saved, the system displays a message such as the following:
MMM DD, YYYY HH:MM:SS XM
RESTORE SETUP DATA: NO

To restore setup data in response to this message, press CHANGE, then press ENTER.

Archiving Setup Data
Once you have selected the Archive Utility, press STEP, if necessary, until you see the message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
SAVE SETUP DATA: NO

If you do not wish to save setup data, press STEP. (The system displays the RESTORE SETUP DATA message.)

28-1

28 Archive Utility

Restoring Archived Setup Data

To save setup data, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
SAVE SETUP DATA: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

The system asks you to reconfirm your choice with the following message:
SAVE SETUP DATA: YES
ARE YOU SURE?: NO

To abandon the save process, press STEP. (The system displays the RESTORE SETUP DATA message.) To
continue saving setup data, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ARE YOU SURE?: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

When you press STEP in response to this message, the system starts saving your setup data to the EEPROM.
This process may take a minute or so. When the save is completed, the system returns the original message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to use another archive feature or press either FUNCTION or MODE to exit the Archive Utility.

Restoring Archived Setup Data
NOTE: If you are restoring after a reboot (switching the console Off and then back On), the system will wait 5
minutes before processing your request to restore archived setup data. This delay is to allow all hardware to
initialize.
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
RESTORE SETUP DATA: NO

If you do not wish to restore setup data, press STEP. (The system displays the CLEAR SETUP DATA menu.)
To restore setup data, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system confirms your choice with the message:
RESTORE SETUP DATA: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

The system asks you to reconfirm your choice with the following message:
RESTORE SETUP DATA: YES
ARE YOU SURE?: NO

To abandon the restore process, press STEP. (The system displays the CLEAR SETUP DATA menu.) To continue
restoring setup data, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ARE YOU SURE?: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

28-2

28 Archive Utility

Clearing Archived Setup Data

When you press STEP in response to this message, the system starts restoring previously saved setup data from
the EEPROM. This process may take a minute or so. When the restore is completed, the system returns the
original message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

The system also prints a complete listing of all restored setup data.
Press STEP to use another archive feature or press either FUNCTION or MODE to exit the Archive Utility.

Clearing Archived Setup Data
If necessary, press STEP until you see the message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
CLEAR SETUP DATA: NO

If you do not wish to clear setup data in EEPROM, press STEP. (The system returns to the SAVE SETUP DATA
message.)
To clear all current setup data in the EEPROM, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system confirms your
choice with the message:
CLEAR SETUP DATA: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

The system asks you to reconfirm your choice with the following message:
CLEAR SETUP DATA: YES
ARE YOU SURE?: NO

To abandon the clear process, press STEP. (The system returns to the SAVE SETUP DATA message.) To continue
clearing setup data, press CHANGE, then press ENTER. The system displays the message:
ARE YOU SURE?: YES
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

When you press STEP in response to this message, the system starts clearing all current setup information in the
EEPROM. When the clear process is completed, the system returns the original message:
ARCHIVE UTILITY
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to use another archive feature or press either FUNCTION or MODE to exit the Archive Utility.

28-3

Appendix A: Calculating Tank Tilt - International
TLS-350R only--Entering a Tank Tilt value is not recommended if the system is performing automatic Business
Inventory Reconciliation and AccuChart.
If the probe is installed in the center of the tank, the value is 000.00 Metric.
Within Setup Mode, Press FUNCTION until you In-Tank Setup, then press STEP until you see the message:
T1: (Product Label)
TANK TILT: +000.00

Tank Tilt allows you to compensate for a difference between fuel height at the ideal probe location (on the centreline
of the tank with no striker plate underneath) and at the actual probe position (offset from the tank centreline and/or
over a striker plate).
TLS-350R only--Entering a Tank Tilt value is not recommended if the system is performing automatic Business
Inventory Reconciliation and AccuChart.
Table A-1 lists offset values for various tank diametres/probe offset combinations (used in determining Tank Tilt).
Table A-1.- Typical Tank Offset Values

Imp. Diam.
ft-in

Metric
Diam.
mm

Probe
offset
from C/L
50 mm

Probe
offset
from C/L
100 mm

Probe
offset
from C/L
150 mm

Probe
offset
from C/L
200 mm

Probe
offset
from C/L
250 mm

6-0

1829

1

5

12

22

35

7-0

2134

1

5

11

19

30

8-0

2438

1

4

9

17

26

9-0

2743

1

4

8

15

23

9-10

2997

1

3

8

13

21

Vertical offset values given in Table A-1 were derived from the formula:

Oh = R – R – Od
Where,

Oh = vertical offset height
R = tank radius
Od = offset distance from centreline (C/L).

Figure A-1 illustrates the four possible Tank Tilt computational scenarios.

A-1

Appendix A: Calculating Tank Tilt - International

.
1

9
2

10

3

11

12

4

5

13
6

14

7

15

8

15
15

consoles\uktktlt1.eps

Legend for numbered boxes:
1. Tank Tilt = +000.00
2. No offset
3. Probe
4. No striker plate
5. Tank Tilt = Offset Value (No Striker Plate)
6. No offset
7. Probe
8. Tank Tilt (mm) (read from table)

9. Tank Tilt = Striker Plate Thickness
10. No offset
11. Probe
12. Thickness of striker plate
13. Tank Tilt = Offset Value + Striker Plate Thickness
14. No offset
15. Probe
16. Offset value (read from table)

Figure A-1. Methods for Determining the Tank Tilt Entry

A-2

Appendix A: Calculating Tank Tilt - International

ENTERING THE TANK TILT VALUE
To enter the Tank Tilt value for the selected tank, press CHANGE. If the value is negative, press the +/- key so that
a minus (-) sign appears on the display. Enter the value as calculated according to the above procedures (inches
or millimetres depending on the units specified in System Setup). Press ENTER to confirm your entry. The system
displays:
TANK TILT: ±XXX.XX
PRESS  TO CONTINUE

Press STEP to continue.

A-3

Appendix B: Setup Parameters for TLS-300 System - International
The following list of setup parameters is intended for use as a programming guide for the commissioning engineer.

System Setup
Table B-1. System Setup

Parameter

Default

Set As

Time & Date

08:00 01:01:94

Current Time &
Date

System Units

Metric

Default

System Language

English

As Required

Header Message 1

None

Site Name

Header Message 2

None

Site Address

Header Message 3

None

Site Address

Header Message 4

None

Site Address

Shift Time 1

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 2

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 3

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 4

Disabled

Default

Tank Per Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Tank Ann Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Print TC Vol.

Enabled

Disable

Temp. Comp. °C

15.6

Default

Stick Height Offset

Disabled

Disabled

Daylight Savings Time

Enabled

Default

H Protocol Format

Height

Default

Security Code

000000

xxxxxx

B-1

Appendix B: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-300

Comm Board (1, 2, etc.) Setup

Comm Board (1, 2, etc.) Setup
Table B-2.

Comm Board Setup

Parameter

Default

Set As

Baud Rate

1200

Comm Rate for
Third Party Equip.

Parity

Odd

Parity for Third
Party Equip.

Stop Bit

1 Stop

Default

Data Length

7 Data

Default

In-Tank Setup
Table B-3. In-tank Setup

Parameter

Default

Set As

Product Label

None

As Tank Product
(e.g. UL UNLEADED)

Product Code

1 to 8

Default

Thermal Coeff.

000000

0.00126 Spirit, 0.00300 LPG
0.00081 DV

Tank Diameter

00000

As Tank Diameter

Tank Profile

1 Point

1 Point Flat Ends
4 Point Shallow-dished Ends.
20 Point Hemispherical Ends.
Linear for Vertical Cylindrical & Rectangular Tanks

Full Volume

00000

100% Tank Volume

Label Vol.

As 100% Vol.

As Tank Label

Float Size

Depends on probe type

Enter as used

Water Warning

00.00

25.0 mm

Water Limit

00.0

32.0 mm

Overfill Vol.

000%

99%

High Product

000%

98% if Label Volume >25,000 litres, or 96% if Label Volume <25,000 litres

Delivery Limit

001%

Default

B-2

Appendix B: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-300

Leak Test Method Setup

Table B-3. In-tank Setup

Parameter

Default

Set As

Low Product:
Mag Type 8473
Mag Type 8493

00000
0000

Vol at 250 mm
Vol at 125 mm

Leak Alarm Limit

374

10 litres

Sudden Loss Limit

374

200 litres

Tank Tilt

0

10 mm

Manifold Tanks

None

Default*

Leak Min. Annual

0

60%

Periodic Test Type

Standard

Default

Annual Test fail Al.

Disabled

Default

Periodic Test Fail Al.

Disabled

Default

Gross Test Fail

Disabled

Default

Ann. Test Averaging

OFF

Default

Per. Test Averaging

OFF

Default

Tank Test Notify

OFF

ON

Tank Test Siphon B

OFF

Default

Delivery Delay

1 Minute

15 Minutes

The product code for all partners should be the same, e.g., tank 1 product code 1 manifold partner tank 4 product
code 1.

Leak Test Method Setup
Table B-4. Leak Test Method Setup

Parameter

Default

Set As

Test on Date

Current T & D All Tanks

Default

Start Time

Disabled

Default

Test Rate

0.76 LPH

0.38 LPH

Duration

2 Hours

4 Hours

B-3

Appendix C: Setup Parameters for TLS-350 System - International
The following list of setup parameters is intended for use as a programming guide for the commissioning engineer.

Table C-1. System Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Time & Date

08:00 01:01:94

Current Time & Date

System Units

Metric

Default

System Language

English

Default

Time/Date Format

DD-MM-YY HH-MM-SS

MON-DD-YY HH:MM:SS

Header Message 1

None

Site Name

Header Message 2

None

Site Address

Header Message 3

None

Site Address

Header Message 4

None

Site Address

Shift Time 1

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 2

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 3

Disabled

Default

Shift Time 4

Disabled

Default

Shift BIR Prn

Disable

Default

Daily BIR Prn

Enabled

Default*

Ticketed Delivery

Disabled

Default

TC Ticketed Delivery

Disabled

Default

Close Day of Week

Sun

Default

Tank Per Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Tank Per Tst Needed Wrn Days

Disabled

Default

Tank Per Tst Needed Alm Days

Disabled

Default

Tank Ann Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Tank Ann Tst Needed Wrn Days

Disabled

Default

Tank Ann Tst Needed Alm Days

355 days

Default

Line Per Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Line Per Tst Needed Wrn Days

Disabled

Default

Line Per Tst Needed Alm Days

Disabled

Default

C-1

Appendix C: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-350

Table C-1. System Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Line Ann Tst Needed Wrn

Disabled

Default

Line Ann Tst Needed Wrn Days

Disabled

Default

Line Ann Tst Needed Alm Days

Disabled

Default

Remote Printer Page Eject

Disabled

Default

Print TC Vol.

Enabled

Disable

Temp. Comp. 15.6°C

Enabled

Default

Stick Height Offset

Disabled

Disabled

H Protocol Format

Height

Default

Precision Test Duration
Precision Line Test Auto-Confirm

Enabled

Daylight Savings Time

Enabled

MAR WK6 SUN 03:00AM
OCT WK6 SUN 04:00AM

Re-Direct Local Printout

Disabled

Default

QPLD Monthly Printout

Enabled

Default*

BDIM Transaction Delay

24

Default

Euro Protocol Prefix

S

Default

Security Code

000000

XXXXXX

*IMPORTANT: If Gilbarco T24 (BDIM) Site Controllers are to be interfaced to the gauge on a Non-24-Hour site,
this parameter should be set to DISABLED.

Table C-2. Comm Board (1, 2, Etc.) Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Baud Rate

1200

Comm Rate for Third Party Equip.

Parity

Odd

Parity for Third Party Equip.

Stop Bit

1 Stop

Default

Data Length

7 Data

Default

C-2

Appendix C: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-350

Table C-3. In-tank Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Product Label

None

As Tank Product
(e.g. UL unleaded)

Product Code

1 to 8

Default

Thermal Coeff.

000000

0.00126 Spirit, 0.00300 LPG
0.00081 DV

Tank Diameter

00000

As Tank Diameter

Tank Profile

1 Point

1 Point Flat Ends
4 Point Shallow-dished Ends.
20 Point Hemispherical Ends.
Linear for Vertical Cylindrical & Rectangular Tanks

Full Volume

00000

100% Tank Volume

Point 2

00000

75% Tank Diameter

Point 3

00000

50% Tank Diameter

Point 4

00000

25% Tank Diameter

Meter Data

No

Yes

End Factor

Other

Cal. Update

Periodic

Default (except select NEVER for Linear Tanks)

Float Size

101 mm (8496 and 8499
types)

50 or 76 mm (according to size fitted)

Water Warning

00.00

25.0 mm

Water Limit

00.0

32.0 mm

Label Vol.

as 100% Vol.

As Tank Label

Overfill Vol.

000%

99%

High Product

000%

98% if Label Volume >25,000 litres, or 96% if Label
Volume <25,000 litres

Delivery Limit

001%

Default

Low Product:
Mag Type 8473
Mag Type 8493

00000
0000

Vol at 250 mm
Vol at 125 mm

Leak Alarm Limit

374

10 litres

Sudden Loss Limit

374

200 litres

Tank Tilt

0

10 mm

Manifold Tanks

None

Default*

C-3

Appendix C: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-350

Table C-3. In-tank Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Leak Min. Annual

0

60%

Periodic Test Type

Standard

Default

Annual Test fail Al.

Disabled

Default

Periodic Test Fail Al.

Disabled

Default

Gross Test Fail

Disabled

Default

Ann. Test Averaging

OFF

Default

Per. Test Averaging

OFF

Default

Tank Test Notify

OFF

ON

Tank Test Siphon B

OFF

Default

Recon Warning Limit

3 litres

4 litres*

Recon Alarm Limit

4 litres

5 litres*

Delivery Delay

1 Minute

15 Minutes

*When manifolded tanks are to be configured in order that the system does not give false RECONCILIATION
WARNINGS AND ALARMS, the parameters for reconciliation should be set to 7 LITRES for RECON
WARNINGS and 8 LITRES for RECON ALARMS.
The product code for all partners should be the same, e.g., tank 1 product code 1 manifold partner tank 4 product
code 1.
The calibration update setup parameter must be set to NEVER as systems using a BDIM are theoretically unable
to carry out good calibration. "NEVER" will allow the system to run using only the 1, 4, or 20 point user data input
at time of commissioning.
All of the above setup parameters are required whenever manifolds are to be set if a BDIM is in use.
NOTE: METER DATA should be set to YES – this will allow BIR to run for the manifolded tanks on site.

Table C-4. Leak Test Method Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

Test on Date

Current T & D All Tanks

Default

Start Time

Disabled

Default

Test Rate

0.76 LPH

Default

Duration

2 Hours

4 Hours

C-4

Appendix C: Typical Setup Parameters - TLS-350

Table C-5. Reconciliation Setup
Parameter

Default

Set As

DIM 1

Default String

As Site Controller

Auto Daily Closing

02:00 AM

Default

To Shift 1 Closing Time

Disabled

Default

To Shift 2 Closing Time

Disabled

Default

To Shift 3 Closing Time

Disabled

Default

To Shift 4 Closing Time

Disabled

Default

Periodic Recon. Mode

Monthly

Rolling**

**Setting Periodic Recon Mode to Rolling will ensure 31 days of data may be viewed at any time (after the first 31
days of operation).

C-5

For technical support, sales or
other assistance, please visit:
www.veeder.com



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : David Paris
Create Date                     : 2008:10:14 13:45:34Z
Modify Date                     : 2011:10:12 14:13:45-04:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Metadata Date                   : 2011:10:12 14:13:45-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : _623MAN.BK
Creator                         : David Paris
Document ID                     : uuid:fe7003f2-ee15-46b4-83c6-35b9166fb903
Instance ID                     : uuid:7256bf23-c749-491a-8739-37617e94a6ad
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 222
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu